Mapp300 - 400-Eng V2 - 42 PDF

MAPP300.
400-ENG
Power Panel 300/400

User's Manual
Version: 2.42 (March 2016)

Model no.: MAPP300.400-ENG
All information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. We reserve the
right to change the contents of this manual without warning. The information contained herein is
believed to be accurate as of the date of publication; however, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-
Elektronik Ges.m.b.H. makes no warranty, expressed or implied, with regard to the products or
documentation contained within this manual. In addition, Bernecker + Rainer Industrie-Elektronik
Ges.m.b.H. shall not be liable in the event of incidental or consequential damages in connection
with or resulting from the furnishing, performance or use of these products. The software names,
hardware names, and trademarks used in this manual are registered by the respective
companies.
Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 1

2 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42
Chapter 1: General information
Chapter 2: Technical data
Chapter 3: Commissioning
Chapter 4: Software
Chapter 5: Standards and certifications
Chapter 6: Accessories

Chapter 7: Maintenance / Servicing
Appendix A
Figure index
Table index
Model number index
Index

Table of contents
Table of contents
Chapter 1: General information ..................................................... 21

1. Manual history .................................................................................................................... 21
2. Safety notices ..................................................................................................................... 26
2.1 Intended use .................................................................................................................. 26
2.2 Protection against electrostatic discharge ..................................................................... 26
2.2.1 Packaging ............................................................................................................... 26
2.2.2 Guidelines for proper ESD handling ....................................................................... 26
2.3 Policy and procedures ................................................................................................... 27
2.4 Transport and storage ................................................................................................... 27
2.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................... 28
2.6 Operation ....................................................................................................................... 28
2.6.1 Protection against touching electrical parts ............................................................ 28
2.6.2 Environmental conditions - dust, humidity, aggressive gases ................................ 28
2.6.3 Programs, viruses, and dangerous programs ......................................................... 29
2.7 Environmentally-friendly disposal .................................................................................. 29
2.7.1 Separation of materials ........................................................................................... 29
3. Organization of safety notices ............................................................................................ 30
4. Directives ............................................................................................................................ 30
5. Model numbers ................................................................................................................... 31
5.1 Power Panel 300 with BIOS .......................................................................................... 31
5.2 Power Panel 300 with Automation Runtime .................................................................. 32
5.3 Power Panel 400 with Automation Runtime .................................................................. 33
5.4 Power Panel 400 light / compact ................................................................................... 36
5.5 Software ........................................................................................................................ 37
5.6 Accessories ................................................................................................................... 38
Chapter 2: Technical data .............................................................. 41

1. General information ............................................................................................................ 41
1.1 Features ........................................................................................................................ 42
1.2 Differences between Power Panel 300/400 and Power Panel 100/200 ........................ 43
1.2.1 Electrical ................................................................................................................. 43
1.2.2 Mechanical .............................................................................................................. 43
1.3 Temperature sensor locations ....................................................................................... 44
2. Power Panel 300 with BIOS ............................................................................................... 45
2.1 Device interfaces ........................................................................................................... 45
2.1.1 Supply voltage ........................................................................................................ 45
2.1.2 Functional grounding clip ........................................................................................ 46
2.1.3 Serial interface COM ............................................................................................... 47
2.1.4 USB ports ................................................................................................................ 48
2.1.5 Mode/Node switches ............................................................................................... 49
2.1.6 BIOS boot mode switch .......................................................................................... 50
2.1.7 Status LEDs ............................................................................................................ 51
2.1.8 Ethernet interface .................................................................................................... 52
2.1.9 Power button ........................................................................................................... 53
2.1.10 Reset button .......................................................................................................... 53
2.1.11 CompactFlash slot ................................................................................................ 54

Table of contents
2.2 Stickers .......................................................................................................................... 55

2.2.1 Device label ............................................................................................................ 55
2.2.2 Serial number sticker .............................................................................................. 55
2.3 Device 5PP320.0571-29 ............................................................................................... 57
2.3.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 58
2.3.2 Temperature humidity diagram ............................................................................... 61
2.3.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 61
2.3.4 Cutout installation ................................................................................................... 62
2.3.5 Contents of delivery ................................................................................................ 62
2.4 Device 5PP320.0571-39 ............................................................................................... 63
2.4.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 64
2.4.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 67
2.5 Device 5PP320.0573-39 ............................................................................................... 69
2.5.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 70
2.5.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 73
2.6 Device 5PP320.0573-3B ............................................................................................... 75
2.6.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 76
2.6.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 79
2.7 Device 5PP320.1043-39 ............................................................................................... 81
2.7.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 82
2.7.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 85
2.8 Device 5PP320.1214-39 ............................................................................................... 87
2.8.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 88
2.8.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 91
2.9 Device 5PP320.1505-39 ............................................................................................... 93
2.9.1 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 94
2.9.3 Dimensions ............................................................................................................. 97
2.10 Device 5PP320.1505-3B ............................................................................................. 99
2.10.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 100

Table of contents
2.10.2 Temperature humidity diagram ........................................................................... 103

2.10.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 103
2.10.4 Cutout installation ............................................................................................... 104
2.10.5 Contents of delivery ............................................................................................ 104
3. Power Panel 300 with Automation Runtime ..................................................................... 105
3.1 Device interfaces ......................................................................................................... 105
3.1.1 Supply voltage ...................................................................................................... 105
3.1.2 Functional grounding clip ...................................................................................... 106
3.1.3 Serial interface COM ............................................................................................. 107
3.1.4 USB ports .............................................................................................................. 108
3.1.5 Mode/Node switches ............................................................................................. 109
3.1.6 BIOS boot mode switch ........................................................................................ 110
3.1.7 Status LEDs .......................................................................................................... 112
3.1.8 Ethernet interface .................................................................................................. 112
3.1.9 Power button ......................................................................................................... 113
3.1.10 Reset button ........................................................................................................ 113
3.1.11 CompactFlash slot .............................................................................................. 114
3.2 Stickers ........................................................................................................................ 115
3.2.1 Device label .......................................................................................................... 115
3.2.2 Serial number sticker ............................................................................................ 115
3.3 Device 4PP320.0571-01 ............................................................................................. 117
3.3.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 118
3.3.2 Temperature humidity diagram ............................................................................. 121
3.3.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 121
3.3.4 Cutout installation ................................................................................................. 122
3.3.5 Contents of delivery .............................................................................................. 122
3.4 Device 4PP320.0571-35 ............................................................................................. 123
3.4.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 124
3.4.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 127
3.5 Device 4PP320.1043-31 ............................................................................................. 129
3.5.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 130
3.5.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 133
3.6 Device 4PP320.1505-31 ............................................................................................. 135
3.6.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 136
3.6.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 139
3.7 Device 4PP351.0571-01 ............................................................................................. 141
3.7.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 142

Table of contents
3.7.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 145

3.8 Device 4PP351.0571-35 ............................................................................................. 147
3.8.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 148
3.8.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 151
3.9 Device 4PP352.0571-35 ............................................................................................. 153
3.9.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 154
3.9.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 157
3.10 Device 4PP381.1043-31 ........................................................................................... 159
3.10.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 160
3.10.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 163
4. Power Panel 400 with Automation Runtime ..................................................................... 165
4.1 Device interfaces ......................................................................................................... 165
4.1.1 Supply voltage ...................................................................................................... 165
4.1.2 Functional grounding clip ...................................................................................... 166
4.1.3 Serial interface COM ............................................................................................. 167
4.1.4 USB ports .............................................................................................................. 168
4.1.5 Mode/Node switches ............................................................................................. 169
4.1.6 BIOS boot mode switch ........................................................................................ 170
4.1.7 Status LEDs .......................................................................................................... 172
4.1.8 Ethernet interface .................................................................................................. 172
4.1.9 Power button ......................................................................................................... 173
4.1.10 Reset button ........................................................................................................ 173
4.1.11 CompactFlash slot .............................................................................................. 174
4.1.12 aPCI Slot(s) ......................................................................................................... 174
4.2 Stickers ........................................................................................................................ 175
4.2.1 Device label .......................................................................................................... 175
4.2.2 Serial number sticker ............................................................................................ 175
4.3 Device 4PP420.0571-45 ............................................................................................. 177
4.3.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 178
4.3.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 181
4.4 Device 4PP420.0571-65 ............................................................................................. 183
4.4.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 184

Table of contents
4.4.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 187

4.5 Device 4PP420.0571-75 ............................................................................................. 189
4.5.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 190
4.5.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 193
4.6 Device 4PP420.0571-85 ............................................................................................. 195
4.6.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 196
4.6.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 199
4.7 Device 4PP420.0571-A5 ............................................................................................. 201
4.7.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 202
4.7.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 205
4.8 Device 4PP420.0571-B5 ............................................................................................. 207
4.8.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 208
4.8.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 211
4.9 Device 4PP420.0573-75 ............................................................................................. 213
4.9.1 Technical data ....................................................................................................... 214
4.9.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 217
4.10 Device 4PP420.1043-75 ........................................................................................... 219
4.10.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 220
4.10.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 223
4.11 Device 4PP420.1043-B5 ........................................................................................... 225
4.11.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 226
4.11.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 229
4.12 Device 4PP420.1505-75 ........................................................................................... 231
4.12.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 232

Table of contents

4.12.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 235
4.13 Device 4PP420.1505-B5 ........................................................................................... 237
4.13.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 238
4.13.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 241
4.14 Device 4PP451.0571-45 ........................................................................................... 243
4.14.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 244
4.14.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 248
4.15 Device 4PP451.0571-65 ........................................................................................... 250
4.15.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 251
4.15.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 255
4.16 Device 4PP451.0571-75 ........................................................................................... 257
4.16.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 258
4.16.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 262
4.17 Device 4PP451.0571-85 ........................................................................................... 264
4.17.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 265
4.17.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 269
4.18 Device 4PP451.0571-B5 ........................................................................................... 271
4.18.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 272
4.18.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 276
4.19 Device 4PP451.1043-75 ........................................................................................... 278
4.19.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 279
4.19.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 283
4.20 Device 4PP451.1043-B5 ........................................................................................... 285

Table of contents
4.20.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 286

4.20.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 290
4.21 Device 4PP452.0571-45 ........................................................................................... 292
4.21.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 293
4.21.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 297
4.22 Device 4PP452.0571-65 ........................................................................................... 299
4.22.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 300
4.22.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 304
4.23 Device 4PP452.0571-75 ........................................................................................... 306
4.23.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 307
4.23.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 311
4.24 Device 4PP452.0571-B5 ........................................................................................... 313
4.24.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 314
4.24.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 318
4.25 Device 4PP452.1043-75 ........................................................................................... 320
4.25.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 321
4.25.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 325
4.26 Device 4PP480.1043-75 ........................................................................................... 327
4.26.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 328
4.26.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 332
4.27 Device 4PP480.1505-75 ........................................................................................... 334
4.27.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 335
4.27.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 339

Table of contents
4.28 Device 4PP480.1505-B5 ........................................................................................... 341

4.28.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 342
4.28.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 346
4.29 Device 4PP481.1043-75 ........................................................................................... 348
4.29.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 349
4.29.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 353
4.30 Device 4PP481.1043-B5 ........................................................................................... 355
4.30.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 356
4.30.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 360
4.31 Device 4PP481.1505-75 ........................................................................................... 362
4.31.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 363
4.31.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 367
4.32 Device 4PP482.1043-75 ........................................................................................... 369
4.32.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 370
4.32.3 Dimensions ......................................................................................................... 374
5. Power Panel light / compact ............................................................................................. 376
5.1 Power Panel 420 light / compact ................................................................................. 376
5.1.1 Technical data - Power Panel 420 light ................................................................ 376
5.1.2 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light, monochrome LCD ........................ 380
5.1.3 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light color LCD and color TFT ............... 380
5.1.4 Technical data - Power Panel 420 compact ......................................................... 381
5.1.5 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact, monochrome LCD ................. 384
5.1.6 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact color LCD and color TFT ........ 385

Table of contents

6. Block diagram ................................................................................................................... 402
6.1 Power Panel 300 (with no aPCI slots) ......................................................................... 402
6.2 Power Panel 400 with 1 aPCI slot ............................................................................... 403
6.3 Power Panel 400 with 2 aPCI slots ............................................................................. 404
Chapter 3: Commissioning .......................................................... 405

1. Mounting instructions ........................................................................................................ 405
2. Mounting orientation ......................................................................................................... 407
3. Touch screen calibration ................................................................................................... 409
3.1 Windows CE ................................................................................................................ 409
3.2 Windows XP embedded .............................................................................................. 409
3.3 Automation Runtime / Visual Components .................................................................. 409
4. Screen rotation ................................................................................................................. 410
4.1 Windows XP embedded .............................................................................................. 410
4.2 Windows CE ................................................................................................................ 410
4.3 Automation Runtime / Visual Components .................................................................. 410
5. User tips for increasing the display lifespan ..................................................................... 411
5.1 Backlight ...................................................................................................................... 411
5.2 How can the lifespan of backlights be extended? ....................................................... 411
5.3 Image sticking ............................................................................................................. 411
5.4 What causes image sticking? ...................................................................................... 411
5.5 How can image sticking be avoided? .......................................................................... 412
6. Pixel error ......................................................................................................................... 412
Chapter 4: Software ...................................................................... 413

1. Power Panel 300 with BIOS ............................................................................................. 413
1.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 413
1.2 Summary screen ......................................................................................................... 414
1.3 BIOS settings for VGA, SVGA and XGA Power Panel devices .................................. 417
1.3.1 Main menu ............................................................................................................ 417
1.3.2 Time ...................................................................................................................... 418
1.3.3 Date ...................................................................................................................... 419
1.3.4 Motherboard device configuration ......................................................................... 420
1.3.5 Memory and cache optimization ........................................................................... 427
1.3.6 System clock/PLL configuration ............................................................................ 428
1.3.7 Power management .............................................................................................. 429
1.3.8 Device information ................................................................................................ 430
1.3.9 Miscellaneous configuration .................................................................................. 432
1.3.10 Boot order ........................................................................................................... 433
1.3.11 Load defaults ...................................................................................................... 435
1.3.12 Save values without exit ..................................................................................... 436
1.3.13 Exit without save ................................................................................................. 437
1.3.14 Save values and exit ........................................................................................... 438
1.4 BIOS settings for QVGA Power Panel devices ........................................................... 439
1.4.1 Main menu ............................................................................................................ 439

Table of contents
1.4.2 Time ...................................................................................................................... 440

1.4.3 Date ...................................................................................................................... 441
1.4.10 Boot order ........................................................................................................... 454
1.4.11 Load defaults ...................................................................................................... 456
1.4.12 Save values without exit ..................................................................................... 457
1.4.13 Exit without save ................................................................................................. 457
1.4.14 Save values and exit ........................................................................................... 458
1.5 BIOS default values ..................................................................................................... 459
1.5.7 Boot order ............................................................................................................. 461
1.5.8 Restoring the default BIOS values ........................................................................ 461
1.6 Software updates ........................................................................................................ 462
1.7 CMOS backup ............................................................................................................. 462
1.8 Distribution of resources .............................................................................................. 463
1.8.1 RAM address assignment ..................................................................................... 463
1.8.2 DMA channel assignment ..................................................................................... 463
1.8.3 I/O address assignment ........................................................................................ 464
1.8.4 Interrupt assignment ............................................................................................. 465
2. Power Panel 300/400 with Automation Runtime .............................................................. 466
2.1.1 Summary screen ................................................................................................... 466
2.2 Control and visualization with the Power Panel 300 device ........................................ 467
2.3 Power Panel 400 with Power Panel 300 terminals ...................................................... 468
2.4 Software updates ........................................................................................................ 469
3. Upgrade information ......................................................................................................... 470
3.1 BIOS upgrade .............................................................................................................. 470
3.1.1 What information do I need? ................................................................................. 470
3.1.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 471
3.2 MTCX Firmware upgrade (MTCX FPGA, MTCX PX32) .............................................. 473
3.2.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 473
3.3 aPCI firmware upgrade disk ........................................................................................ 475
3.3.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 475
3.4 User boot logo upgrade disk ....................................................................................... 476
3.4.1 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 477
3.4.2 Guidelines for creating a user boot logo ............................................................... 478
3.5 Creating a DOS boot diskette in Windows XP ............................................................ 479

Table of contents
3.6 Creating a bootable USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files ........................................ 481
3.6.1 Requirements ........................................................................................................ 481
3.6.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 481
3.6.3 Where do I get MS-DOS? ..................................................................................... 482
3.7 Creating a bootable CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files .................................. 483
3.7.1 Requirements ........................................................................................................ 483
3.7.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 483
3.7.3 Where do I get MS-DOS? ..................................................................................... 484
4. Power Panel with Windows CE ........................................................................................ 485
4.2 Windows CE 5.0 features ............................................................................................ 486
4.3 Windows CE 6.0 features ............................................................................................ 487
4.4 Differences between Windows CE 6.0 and Windows CE 5.0 ..................................... 487
4.5 Requirements .............................................................................................................. 488
4.6 Installation ................................................................................................................... 488
4.6.1 B&R Embedded OS Installer ................................................................................ 488
5. Power Panel with Windows XP embedded ....................................................................... 489
5.2 Features with FP2007 (Feature Pack 2007) ............................................................... 489
5.3 Installation ................................................................................................................... 490
6. Power Panel with Windows Embedded Standard 2009 ................................................... 491
6.2 Features with WES2009 (Windows Embedded Standard 2009) ................................. 492
6.3 Installation ................................................................................................................... 493
6.4 Drivers ......................................................................................................................... 493
6.4.1 Touch screen driver .............................................................................................. 493
7. VESA mode support ......................................................................................................... 494
8. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center ................................................ 495
8.1 Functions ..................................................................................................................... 496
8.2 Installation ................................................................................................................... 497
Chapter 5: Standards and certifications ..................................... 499

1. Applicable European directives ........................................................................................ 499
2. Overview of standards ...................................................................................................... 499
3. Emission requirements ..................................................................................................... 501
3.1 Network-related emissions .......................................................................................... 501
3.2 Emissions, electromagnetic emissions ........................................................................ 502
4. Requirements for immunity to disturbances ..................................................................... 503
4.1 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ..................................................................................... 504
4.2 High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field) ........................................................ 504
4.3 High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst) ................................................... 505
4.4 Surges ......................................................................................................................... 505
4.5 Conducted disturbances .............................................................................................. 505
4.6 Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies .................................................................. 506
4.7 Voltage dips, fluctuations, and short-term interruptions .............................................. 506
4.8 Damped vibration ........................................................................................................ 507

Table of contents
5. Mechanical conditions ...................................................................................................... 508

5.1 Vibration operation ...................................................................................................... 508
5.2 Vibration during transport (packaged) ......................................................................... 509
5.3 Shock during operation ............................................................................................... 509
5.4 Shock during transport (packaged) ............................................................................. 509
5.5 Toppling ....................................................................................................................... 509
5.6 Free fall (packaged) .................................................................................................... 510
6. Climate conditions ............................................................................................................ 511
6.1 Worst case operation .................................................................................................. 511
6.2 Dry heat ....................................................................................................................... 511
6.3 Dry cold ....................................................................................................................... 511
6.4 Large temperature fluctuations .................................................................................... 512
6.5 Temperature fluctuations in operation ......................................................................... 512
6.6 Humid heat, cyclic ....................................................................................................... 512
6.7 Humid heat, constant (storage) ................................................................................... 512
6.8 Sprayed water (front side) ........................................................................................... 513
7. Safety ................................................................................................................................ 514
7.1 Ground resistance ....................................................................................................... 514
7.2 Insulation resistance .................................................................................................... 514
7.3 High voltage ................................................................................................................ 515
7.4 Voltage range .............................................................................................................. 515
8. Other tests ........................................................................................................................ 516
8.1 Protection .................................................................................................................... 516
9. International certifications ................................................................................................. 517
Chapter 6: Accessories ................................................................ 519

1. Overview ........................................................................................................................... 519
2. Replacement CMOS batteries .......................................................................................... 521
2.1 Order data ................................................................................................................... 521
2.2 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 521
2.3 Contents of delivery ..................................................................................................... 522
3. TB103 3-pin supply voltage connector ............................................................................. 523
3.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 523
3.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 524
3.4 Contents of delivery ..................................................................................................... 524
4. Legend strip templates ..................................................................................................... 525
4.1 Order data ................................................................................................................... 526
5. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 ............................................................................ 527
5.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 527
5.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 528
5.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram - Operation and storage ...................................... 530
5.4 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 530
5.5 Benchmark .................................................................................................................. 531
6. CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 .......................................................................... 532

Table of contents

6.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 532
6.3 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 533
6.4 Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 535
7. USB flash drive ................................................................................................................. 536
7.2 Order data ................................................................................................................... 536
7.3 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-00 ............................................................................ 537
7.4 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-01 ............................................................................ 539
8. Null modem cable 9A0017.0x ........................................................................................... 541
8.1 Order data ................................................................................................................... 541
8.2 Technical data ............................................................................................................. 541
8.3 Cable specifications .................................................................................................... 542
9. HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00 ................................................................. 543
Chapter 7: Maintenance / Servicing ............................................ 549

1. Cleaning ............................................................................................................................ 549
2. Changing the battery ........................................................................................................ 550
2.1 General Information ..................................................................................................... 550
2.2 Procedure for changing the battery ............................................................................. 550
3. Preventing after-image effect in LCD/TFT monitors ......................................................... 552
3.1 What measures can be taken against this? ................................................................ 552
Appendix A: Appendix A .............................................................. 553

1. Touch screen .................................................................................................................... 553
1.1 Elo Accu Touch ........................................................................................................... 553
1.1.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................ 554
1.2 Gunze Touch ............................................................................................................... 555
1.2.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................ 556
1.3 Touch Screen - AMT ................................................................................................... 557
1.3.2 Cleaning ................................................................................................................ 558
2. Membrane ......................................................................................................................... 559
3. Viewing angles .................................................................................................................. 560
4. Mounting compatibilities ................................................................................................... 561
4.1 Compatibility overview ................................................................................................. 561
4.2 Compatibility details .................................................................................................... 563
4.2.1 5,7" devices ........................................................................................................... 563
4.2.2 10,4" devices ......................................................................................................... 565
4.2.3 12,1" devices ......................................................................................................... 567
4.2.4 15" devices ............................................................................................................ 568

Table of contents
5. B&R Key Editor information .............................................................................................. 569

6. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit ................................................. 571
7. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK ......................................................... 573
8. Glossary ............................................................................................................................ 575

General information Manual history
General information
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 General information
Information:
B&R works hard to keep the printed versions of its user's manuals as current as
possible. However, any newer versions of the User's Manual can always be
downloaded in electronic form (pdf) from the B&R homepage www.br-
automation.com.
1. Manual history
Version Date Change

0.10 Preliminary 2006-10-31 - First version
1.00 2006-11-21 - Contents of delivery for individual components expanded.
- "Standards and certifications", on page 499 added.
- "Touch screen", on page 553 added.
- "Membrane", on page 559 added.
- "Glossary", on page 575 added.
- 2 GB USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-00 from SanDisk added.
- Document now includes the chm tag "Filename".
- Model numbers for Windows CE, Windows XPe and the HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD added.
- Rear view of devices 5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39 and 5PP320.1214-39
added.
- Text changes: General device interfaces on device interfaces.
- "Distribution of resources", on page 463 added.
- "VESA mode support", on page 494 added.
- "Power Panel 300/400 with Automation Runtime", on page 466 added.
- aPCI slot cover added.
- "Legend strip templates", on page 525 added.
- "Mounting orientation", on page 407 added.
- "Null modem cable 9A0017.0x", on page 541 added.
- "Mounting compatibilities", on page 561 added.
Table 1: Manual history

Version Date Change

1.10 2007-02-22 - Rear view of device 5PP320.1505-39 added.
- Driver support information modified.
- Section "Automation Runtime and SMC" removed.
- Images of battery exchange changed.
- CompactFlash 8192 MB SSI is enabled.
- Image of Ethernet connection changed.
- Label description and images changed (there is no longer a safety sticker).
- aPCI slot cover section removed.
- HMI Drivers and Utilities DVD section removed.
- Technical data (L1 cache, L2 cache, Touch Controller, SRAM on BIOS devices) revised.
- Figure text added for Figure 149.
- Windows CE description updated.
- Serial number sticker changed.
- "Distribution of resources", on page 463 revised.
- "Automation Runtime summary screen - ex. 4PP420.1043-75", on page 466 changed.
- Rear views added.
- Chapter "Power Panel 300 with BIOS", on page 413 updated.
1.20 2007-04-20 - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.0256-00 and USB flash drive 5MMUSB.1024-00 canceled.
- "Automation Runtime summary screen - ex. 4PP420.1043-75", on page 466 revised.
- Rear views for devices 4PP420.0571-A5, 4PP451.0571-65 and 4PP481.1043-B5 added.
- Section "USB flash drive", on page 536 updated.
- Chapter "Power Panel 300 with BIOS", on page 413 updated.
1.30 2007-05-04 - Chapter 4 "Software", on page 413 updated.
1.40 2007-10-22 - New PP300/400 devices added (4PP320.0571-01, 4PP320.0571-35, 4PP320.1043-31,
4PP320.1505-31, 5PP320.0571-39, 4PP420.0571-75, 4PP420.0571-B5, 4PP451.0571-75,
4PP452.0571-75).
- Battery information expanded ("Changing the battery", on page 550).
- New model numbers for Windows CE and Windows XPe expanded.
- Windows CE and Windows XPe information updated.
- Additional temperature humidity diagram information
- Section 3 "Preventing after-image effect in LCD/TFT monitors", on page 552 added
- Section "Touch screen calibration", on page 409 added
- Section 2.6.2 "Environmental conditions - dust, humidity, aggressive gases", on page 28 added
- Section "Replacement CMOS batteries", on page 521 updated.
- Real-time clock specifications updated in technical data for the individual components (footnote).
- Extensive changes
1.50 2008-05-27 - Vibration / shock data revised
- Error correction (a touch screen was added in the technical data for 4PP451 and 4PP452).
- New PP300/400 devices added (5PP320.0573-3B, 4PP351.0571-01, 4PP351.0571-35,
4PP352.0571-35, 4PP381.1043-31, 4PP451.0571-45, 4PP451.0571-85, 4PP451.0571-B5,
4PP451.1043-75, 4PP451.1043-B5, 4PP452.0571-45, 4PP452.0571-B5, 4PP452.1043-75,
4PP480.1505-B5).
- Text changed from Compact Flash to CompactFlash
- Windows CE 6.0 (5SWWCE.0821-ENG) added as the operating system for PP300 BIOS devices.
- File name markers optimized for AS Help.
- Information added to the Screen Rotation in every device.
- Standards adjustment on page 499.
Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Version Date Change
General information
1.60 2008-11-05 - Change to Automation Device Interface (ADI) Control Center on page 495.
Chapter 1
- B&R Key Editor moved from chapter 4 "Software" to chapter "Appendix" on page 569.
- Information for battery lifespan changed in chapter 2 "Technical data".
- Update of Power Panel compact / light devices (4PP420:0571-L05, 4PP420:0571-L45,
4PP420:0571-L25, 4PP420:0571-L65, 4PP420:0571-L35, 4PP420:0571-L75, 4PP420:0571-C05,
4PP420:0571-C45, 4PP420:0571-C25, 4PP420:0571-C65, 4PP420:0571-C35, 4PP420:0571-
C75, 4PP451:0571-L25, 4PP451:0571-L65, 4PP451:0571-L35, 4PP451:0571-L75, 4PP451:0571-
C25, 4PP451:0571-C65, 4PP451:0571-C35, 4PP451:0571-C75, 4PP452:0571-L25,
4PP452:0571-L65, 4PP452:0571-L35, 4PP452:0571-L75, 4PP452:0571-L25, 4PP452:0571-L65,
4PP452:0571-L35, 4PP452:0571-L75).
- Block diagrams updated for PP300 and PP400 on page 402.
- User ID description expanded.
- Temperature/humidity diagrams for PP300 and PP400 updated.
- Topology images changed (design updated).
- Grounding resistance changed to bleeder resistance.
- ADI development kit on page 571 updated.
- Error corrected for the 4PP3xx devices - Devices are not battery buffered.
1.70 2009-01-20 - Technical data corrected for devices: 4PP351.0571-01, 4PP351.0571-35,
4PP352.0571-35, 4PP452.1043-75 - these devices have no touch screen.
- 4PP451.0571-85 device: Contents of delivery and technical data changed-> incorrect display
description.
- 4PP451.1043-75 device: Description and technical data changed for device - it only has 1 aPCI
slot.
- Phantom key information changed.
- Model numbers 5SWWCE.0522-ENG, 5SWWCE.0622-ENG, 5SWWCE.0822-ENG,
5SWWXP.0422-ENG added.
- Section 2.7 "Environmentally-friendly disposal" in chapter 1 "General information" added.
- Temperature and humidity diagrams changed.
- Contents of delivery for USB flash drives removed.
- Mounting orientation -45 and +45 revised.
1.80 2009-04-01 - Display properties corrected for the device 4PP351.0571-35.
- Number of function keys and soft keys corrected for the device 4PP352.0571-35.
- Section 4.2 "Differences between the Windows CE 5.0 versions (Pro - PropPlus)" updated.
- Section 4.4 "Windows CE 6.0 features" updated.
- Displays changed on the devices 4PP320.0571-35, 4PP351.0571-35, 4PP352.0571-35,
4PP420.0571-75, 4PP420.0571-B5, 4PP451.0571-75, 4PP451.0571-B5, 4PP452.0571-75,
4PP452.0571-B5 and 5PP320.0571-39 - changes made to the technical data of the displays.
- Section 7.4 "Creating a bootable USB flash drive", changed on page 479.
- B&R CompactFlash card added.
- Technical data for Silicon Systems CFs revised.

Version Date Change

1.90 2009-07-02 - Model numbers of the Power Panel 452 compact devices corrected.
- Text changed for the Power button on the Automation Runtime devices (page 113 and page 173).
- General information concerning Power Panel compact/light devices added (page 376).
- Section 3.5 "Creating a DOS boot diskette in Windows XP", on page 479 added
- Section 1.6.1 "BIOS Upgrade Disk" on page 470 moved and updated.
- Section 1.6.2 "MTCX Firmware Upgrade (MTCX FPGA, MTCX PX32)" on page 473 moved and
updated.
- Section 1.6.3 "aPCI Firmware Upgrade Disk" on page 475 moved and updated.
- Section 1.6.4 "User Boot Logo Upgrade Disk" on page 476 moved and updated.
- Section 7.4 "Creating a bootable USB flash drive" updated and moved to page 481.
- Section 3.7 "Creating a bootable CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files", on page 483 added
- Section 2 "Power Panel 400 with Automation Runtime" changed to "Power Panel 300/400 with
Automation Runtime", on page 466.
- Temperature humidity diagrams for the devices corrected.
- Temperature humidity diagram and technical data for the Elo Accu touch screen on page 553
updated.
- Temperature values for devices 4PP351.0571-35, 4PP352.0571-35, 4PP451.0571-45,
4PP451.0571-85, 4PP451.1043-75, 4PP451.1043-B5 and 4PP452.0571-45 corrected.
- Section 1.2 "Gunze Touch", on page 555 in "Appendix A" added.
- The touch screen type was added to the technical data for the devices.
2.00 2009-12-18 - Technical data for Power Panel devices updated: Information regarding Half-brightness time
updated (footnote), holding torque for aPCI module updated.
- Section "User tips for increasing the display lifespan", on page 411 added
- "Compact Flash" spelling changed to "CompactFlash".
- Figure 336 "Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-00", on page 538
updated.
- Package amount and model number for lithium battery 0AC201.91 changed.
- Power Panel device 4PP420.0571-85 added to manual, model number also updated in the figure
for cutout installation.
- Color depth for 15" devices corrected.
- Section "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center", on page 495 and section "B&R
Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit", on page 571 updated.
- Section "B&R Key Editor information", on page 569 updated.
- Figure 89 "Rear view - 4PP352.0571-35", on page 153 and 94 "Rear view - 4PP381.1043-31", on
page 159 updated.
- Section "Power Panel with Windows CE", on page 485 updated.
- "Information" added to section "Upgrade information", on page 470.
- Wording in temperature specifications revised throughout document.
- MB specification for memory capacity updated/corrected (pages 164, 170, 330).
- Footnote about altitude and temperature (derating) updated in the technical data (removed from
Touch Screen).
2.10 2010-04-01 - Description and image of supply voltage changed (Figure Supply voltage connection: p.45, p.105,
p.165).
- Power Panel 5PP320.1505-3B added to manual (p.99).
- Windows Embedded Standard 2009 added to manual (p.491).
- Sections 2.1.6 "BIOS boot mode switch", on page 50, 3.1.6 "BIOS boot mode switch", on page 110
and 4.1.6 "BIOS boot mode switch", on page 170 added.
2.20 2010-07-13 - Technical data for Power Panel devices updated:
Table entry "B&R ID code" added;
SRAM information "Remanent variables for AR (Automation Runtime) in power fail mode" added.
2.30 2010-07-28 - B&R flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01 added to the section "USB flash drive", on page 536.
- Section "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit", on page 571 updated.
- Section "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center", on page 495 updated.
2.40 2011-04-08 - Chapter 5 "Standards and certifications", on page 499 revised.
- Section 1.3 "Temperature sensor locations", on page 44 in chapter 2 "Technical data" added.
- Section 6 "Pixel error", on page 412 in chapter 3 "Commissioning" added.

Version Date Change
General information
2.41 2011-06-15 - Sections
Chapter 1
"B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center", on page 495,
"B&R Key Editor information", on page 569
and "B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit", on page 571 updated.
- Sections "HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00", on page 543 and "B&R Automation
Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK", on page 573 added.
2.42 2016-03-29 - The technical data of the following Power Panels have been updated:
5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.0573-3B, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
5PP320.1505-39, 5PP320.1505-3B, 4PP320.0571-01, 4PP320.1043-31, 4PP320.1505-31,
4PP381.1043-31, 4PP420.0571-45, 4PP420.0571-65, 4PP420.0571-75, 4PP420.0571-85,
4PP420.0571-A5, 4PP420.0571-B5, 4PP420.0573-75, 4PP420.1043-75, 4PP420.1043-B5,
4PP420.1505-75, 4PP420.1505-B5, 4PP451.0571-45, 4PP451.0571-85, 4PP452.0571-45,
4PP480.1505-75, 4PP480.1505-B5, 4PP481.1043-75, 4PP481.1043-B5, 4PP481.1505-75,
4PP482.1043-75, 4PP451.1043-75, 4PP451.1043-B5, 4PP452.1043-75, 4PP480.1043-75

General information Safety notices
2. Safety notices
2.1 Intended use
Programmable logic controllers (PLCs), operating and monitoring devices (industrial PCs, Power
Panels, Mobile Panels, etc.), and B&R uninterruptible power supplies have been designed,
developed, and manufactured for conventional use in industry. They were not designed,
developed, and manufactured for any use involving serious risks or hazards that could lead to
death, injury, serious physical damage or loss of any kind without the implementation of
exceptionally stringent safety precautions. In particular, such risks and hazards include the use
of these devices to monitor nuclear reactions in nuclear power plants, as well as flight control
systems, flight safety, the control of mass transit systems, medical life support systems and the
control of weapons systems.
2.2 Protection against electrostatic discharge
Electrical components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be handled
accordingly.
2.2.1 Packaging
Electrical components with housing

do not require special ESD packaging, but must be handled properly
(see "Electrical components with housing").
Electrical components without housing
must be protected by ESD-suitable packaging.
2.2.2 Guidelines for proper ESD handling
Electrical components with housing
Do not touch the connector contacts on connected cables.

Do not touch the contact tips on the circuit boards.
Electrical components without housing
In addition to "Electrical components with housing", the following also applies:
Any persons handling electrical components or devices that will be installed in the
electrical components must be grounded.
Components can only be touched on the small sides or on the front plate.
Components should always be stored in a suitable medium (ESD packaging, conductive
foam, etc.).
Metallic surfaces are not suitable storage surfaces!

Electrostatic discharges should be avoided on the components (e.g. through charged
General information
plastics).
Chapter 1
A minimum distance of 10 cm must be kept from monitors and TV sets.
Measurement devices and equipment must be grounded.
Measurement probes on potential-free measurement devices must be discharged on
sufficiently grounded surfaces before taking measurements.
Individual components
ESD protective measures for individual components are thoroughly integrated at B&R
(conductive floors, footwear, arm bands, etc.).
The increased ESD protective measures for individual components are not necessary for our
customers for handling B&R products.
2.3 Policy and procedures
Electronic devices are never completely failsafe. In the event of a failure on the programmable
control system, operating or monitoring device, or uninterruptible power supply, the user is
responsible for ensuring that other devices that may be connected, e.g. motors, are in a secure
state.
Both when using programmable logic controllers and when using operating and monitoring
devices as control systems in conjunction with a soft PLC (e.g. B&R Automation Runtime or
comparable products) or a slot PLC (e.g. B&R LS251 or comparable products), the safety
precautions applying to industrial control systems (e.g. the provision of safety devices such as
emergency stop circuits, etc.) must be observed in accordance with applicable national and
international regulations. The same applies for all other devices connected to the system, such
as drives.
All tasks such as installation, commissioning, and maintenance are only permitted to be carried
out by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel are persons familiar with transport, mounting,
installation, commissioning, and operation of the product who also have the respective
qualifications (e.g. IEC 60364). National accident prevention guidelines must be followed.
The safety notices, connection descriptions (type plate and documentation) and limit values
listed in the technical data are to be read carefully before installation and commissioning and
must be observed.
2.4 Transport and storage
During transport and storage, devices must be protected against impermissible stress
(mechanical loads, temperature, humidity, aggressive atmospheres, etc.).

2.5 Installation
Installation must take place according to the documentation, using suitable equipment
and tools.
Devices must be installed by qualified personnel without voltage applied.
General safety regulations and nationally applicable accident prevention guidelines must
be observed.
Electrical installation must be carried out according to the relevant guidelines (e.g. line
cross section, fuse, protective ground connection).
2.6 Operation
2.6.1 Protection against touching electrical parts
To operate programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices or uninterruptible

power supplies, certain components must carry dangerous voltage levels of over 42 VDC.
Touching one of these parts can result in a life-threatening electric shock. This could lead to
death, severe injury or damage to equipment.
Before turning on the programmable logic controller, the operating and monitoring devices and
the uninterruptible power supply, ensure that the housing is properly grounded (PE rail). The
ground connection must be established when testing the operating and monitoring devices or
the uninterruptible power supply, even when operating them for only a short time.
Before turning the device on, all parts that carry voltage must be securely covered. During
operation, all covers must remain closed.
2.6.2 Environmental conditions - dust, humidity, aggressive gases
Use of operating and monitoring devices (e.g. industrial PCs, power panels, mobile panels, etc.)
and uninterruptible power supplies in very dusty environments should be avoided. Dust
collection on the devices influences their function and, especially in systems with active cooling
(fans), sufficient cooling cannot be guaranteed.
The presence of aggressive gases in the environment can also lead to malfunctions. When
combined with high temperature and humidity, aggressive gases - e.g. with sulfur, nitrogen and
chlorine components - start chemical processes that can damage electronic components very
quickly. Signs of the presence of aggressive gases are blackened copper surfaces and cable
ends on existing installations.
For operation in dusty or humid conditions, correctly installed (cutout installation) operating and
monitoring devices like Automation Panel or Power Panel are protected on the front side. The
rear side of all devices must be protected from dust and humidity and must be cleaned at suitable
intervals.

2.6.3 Programs, viruses, and dangerous programs
General information
Chapter 1
The system is subject to potential danger each time data is exchanged or software is installed
from a data medium (e.g. diskette, CD-ROM, USB flash drive, etc.), a network connection, or the
Internet. The user is responsible for assessing these dangers, implementing preventative
measures such as virus protection programs, firewalls, etc. and obtaining software from reliable
sources.
2.7 Environmentally-friendly disposal
All B&R programmable controllers, operating and monitoring devices, and uninterruptible power
supplies are designed to inflict as little harm on the environment as possible.
2.7.1 Separation of materials
It is necessary to separate different materials so the device can undergo an environmentally-

friendly recycling process.
. Component Disposal
Programmable logic controllers Electronics recycling
Operating and monitoring devices
Uninterruptible power supply
Cables
Cardboard box / paper packaging Paper / cardboard recycling
Plastic packaging Plastic recycling
Table 2: Environmentally-friendly separation of materials
Disposal must comply with the respective legal regulations.

General information Organization of safety notices
3. Organization of safety notices
The safety notices in this manual are organized as follows:
Safety notice Description

Danger! Disregarding safety regulations and notices can be life-threatening.
Caution! Disregarding safety regulations and notices can result in severe injury or substantial damage to
equipment.
Warning! Disregarding safety guidelines and notices can result in injury or damage to equipment.
Information: Important information for preventing errors.
Table 3: Organization of safety notices
4. Directives
European dimension standards apply to all dimensions (e.g. dimension

diagrams, etc.).

General information Model numbers
5. Model numbers
General information
Chapter 1
5.1 Power Panel 300 with BIOS
Model number Short description Note

5PP320.0571-29 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7" QVGA, touch screen See page 57
5.7" QVGA color LCD with touch screen (resistive), 256 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot (type
I), ETH 10/100, RS232, 2x USB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC Cancelled since
(Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.) 4/2008
5PP320.0571-39 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7" QVGA, touch screen See page 63
5.7" QVGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 256 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash
slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side);
24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
5PP320.0573-39 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7" VGA, touch screen See page 69
5.7" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 256 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot
(type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side);
5PP320.0573-3B Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7" VGA See page 75
5.7" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 512 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot
5PP320.1043-39 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 10.4" VGA, touch screen See page 81
10.4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 256 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash
5PP320.1214-39 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 12.1" SVGA, touch screen See page 87
12.1" SVGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 256 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash
5PP320.1505-39 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 15" XGA, touch screen See page 93
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 256 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot
5PP320.1505-3B Power Panel PP320 BIOS 15" XGA, touch screen See page 99
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 512 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot
Table 4: Model number overview - Power Panel 300 devices

5.2 Power Panel 300 with Automation Runtime

4PP320.0571-01 Power Panel PP320 5.7" QVGA, touch screen See page 117
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD with touch screen (resistive), 128 MB SDRAM;
CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65 protection
(front side); 24 VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
4PP320.0571-35 Power Panel PP320 5.7" QVGA, touch screen See page 123
5.7" QVGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 128 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash
slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC
(Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
4PP320.1043-31 Power Panel PP320 10.4" VGA, touch screen See page 129
10.4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 128 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash
slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC
4PP320.1505-31 Power Panel PP320 15" XGA, touch screen See page 135
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 128 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot
(type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC
4PP351.0571-01 Power Panel PP351 5.7" QVGA See page 141
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD; 6 soft keys, 16 function keys and 20 system keys; 128 MB
SDRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65
protection (front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91
separately.)
5.7" QVGA color TFT display; 6 soft keys, 16 function keys and 20 system keys; 128 MB
SDRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65
protection (front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91
separately.)
5.7" QVGA color TFT display; 20 function keys and 20 system keys; 128 MB SDRAM;
CompactFlash slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS 232, 2xUSB; metal housing, IP65 protection
(front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
4PP381.1043-31 Power Panel PP381 10.4" VGA, touch screen See page 159
10.4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 10 soft keys, 28 function keys and
20
system keys, 128 MB SDRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB;
metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage
clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)

5.3 Power Panel 400 with Automation Runtime
General information
Chapter 1
4PP420.0571-45 Power Panel PP420 5.7" QVGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen See page 177
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD with touch screen (resistive), 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512
KB SRAM, CompactFlash slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS232, 2xUSB; battery; metal housing,
IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91
separately.)
5.7" QVGA color LCD with touch screen (resistive), 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB
SRAM, CompactFlash (type I), ETH 10/100, RS232, 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65
protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91
separately.)
5.7" QVGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM, CompactFlash slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS232, 2xUSB; battery; metal
housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp
0TB103.91 separately.)
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD with touch screen (resistive), 2 aPCI slots; 128 MB SDRAM;
0TB103.91 separately).
monochrome LCD with
4PP420.0571-A5 Power Panel PP420 5.7" QVGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen See page 201
5.7" QVGA color LCD with touch screen (resistive), 2 aPCI slots; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB
SRAM, CompactFlash slot (type I), ETH 10/100, RS232, 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65
protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91
separately.)
4PP420.0571-B5 Power Panel PP420 5.7" QVGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen See page 207
5.7" QVGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 2 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP420.0573-75 Power Panel PP420 5.7" VGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen See page 213
5.7" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP420.1043-75 Power Panel PP420 10.4" VGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen See page 219
10,4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
0TB103.91 separately.)*
4PP420.1043-B5 Power Panel PP420 10.4" VGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen See page 225
10,4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 2 aPCI slots; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP420.1505-75 Power Panel PP420 15" XGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen See page 231
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512
KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (Type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing,
IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order 0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamp
separately).


4PP420.1505-B5 Power Panel PP420 15" XGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen See page 237
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive), 2 aPCI slots; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP451.0571-45 Power Panel PP451 5.7" QVGA, 1 aPCI, keys See page 243
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD; 6 soft keys; 16 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128
MB SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB;
battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or
cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately).
5.7" QVGA color LCD; 6 soft keys; 16 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB
SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; Cancelled since
metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage 4/2008
clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
5.7" QVGA color TFT display; 6 soft keys; 16 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128
cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD; 6 soft keys; 16 function and 20 system keys; 2 aPCI slots; 128
cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately).
4PP451.0571-B5 Power Panel PP451 5.7" QVGA, 2 aPCI, keys See page 271
5.7" QVGA color TFT display; 6 soft keys; 16 function and 20 system keys; 2 aPCI slot; 128
4PP451.1043-75 Power Panel PP451 10.4" VGA, 1 aPCI, keys See page 278
10.4" VGA color TFT display; 10 soft keys; 28 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128
4PP451.1043-B5 Power Panel PP451 10.4" VGA, 2 aPCI, keys See page 285
10.4" VGA color TFT display; 10 soft keys; 28 function and 20 system keys; 2 aPCI slot; 128
5.7" QVGA monochrome LCD; 20 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal
housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp
5.7" QVGA color LCD; 20 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB
SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 Cancelled since
protection (front side); 24VDC (Order screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 4/2008
separately.)
Table 6: Model number overview - Power Panel 400 devices (Forts.)

General information
Chapter 1
5.7" QVGA color TFT display; 20 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP452.0571-B5 Power Panel PP452 5.7" QVGA, 2 aPCI, keys See page 313
5.7" QVGA color TFT display; 20 function and 20 system keys; 2 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP452.1043-75 Power Panel PP451 10.4" VGA, 1 aPCI, keys See page 320
10.4" VGA color TFT display; 44 function and 20 system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM;
4PP480.1043-75 Power Panel PP480 10.4" VGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen, keys See page 327
10.4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 10 soft keys and 12 function keys;
1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (Type I); ETH 10/100;
RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order 0TB103.9
screw clamps or 0TB103.91 cage clamps separately).
4PP480.1505-75 Power Panel PP480 15" XGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen, keys See page 334
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 12 soft keys and 20 function keys;
1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH 10/100;
RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order screw
clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
4PP480.1505-B5 Power Panel PP480 15" XGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen, keys See page 341
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 12 soft keys and 20 function keys;
20
system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH
10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC
(Order 0TB103.9 screw clamp or 0TB103.91 cage clamps separately).
4PP481.1043-B5 Power Panel PP481 10.4" VGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen, keys See page 355
20
system keys; 2 aPCI slots; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH
10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order
screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
4PP481.1505-75 Power Panel PP481 15" XGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen, keys See page 362
15" XGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 12 soft keys, 20 function keys and 92
system keys; 1 aPCI slot; 128 MB SDRAM; 512 KB SRAM; CompactFlash slot (type I); ETH
10/100; RS232; 2xUSB; battery; metal housing, IP65 protection (front side); 24 VDC (Order
screw clamp 0TB103.9 or cage clamp 0TB103.91 separately.)
10.4" VGA color TFT display with touch screen (resistive); 44 function keys and 20 system
keys;
Table 6: Model number overview - Power Panel 400 devices (Forts.)

5.4 Power Panel 400 light / compact

4PP420:0571-L05 Power Panel PP420 light monochrome LCD, CAN, touch screen See page 376
Set Power Panel PP420 light CAN; 5.7'' QVGA monochrome LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM.
4PP420:0571-L45 Power Panel PP420 light monochrome LCD, X2X, touch screen See page 376
Set Power Panel PP420 light X2X; 5.7'' QVGA monochrome LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM.
4PP420:0571-L25 Power Panel PP420 light color LCD, CAN, touch screen See page 376
Set Power Panel PP420 light CAN; 5.7'' QVGA color LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM.
4PP420:0571-L65 Power Panel PP420 light color LCD, X2X, touch screen See page 376
Set Power Panel PP420 light X2X; 5.7'' QVGA color LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM.
4PP420:0571-L35 Power Panel PP420 light color TFT, CAN, touch screen See page 376
Set Power Panel PP420 light CAN; 5.7'' QVGA color TFT; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM.
4PP420:0571-L75 Power Panel PP420 light color TFT, X2X, touch screen See page 376
Set Power Panel PP420 light X2X; 5.7'' QVGA color TFT; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM.
4PP420:0571-C05 Power Panel PP420 compact monochrome LCD, CAN, touch screen See page 381
Set Power Panel PP420 compact CAN; 5.7'' QVGA monochrome LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP420:0571-C45 Power Panel PP420 compact monochrome LCD, X2X, touch screen See page 381
Set Power Panel PP420 compact X2X; 5.7'' QVGA monochrome LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP420:0571-C25 Power Panel PP420 compact color LCD, CAN, touch screen See page 381
Set Power Panel PP420 compact CAN; 5.7'' QVGA color LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP420:0571-C65 Power Panel PP420 compact color LCD, X2X, touch screen See page 381
Set Power Panel PP420 compact X2X; 5.7'' QVGA color LCD; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP420:0571-C35 Power Panel PP420 compact color TFT, CAN, touch screen See page 381
Set Power Panel PP420 compact CAN; 5.7'' QVGA color TFT; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP420:0571-C75 Power Panel PP420 compact color TFT, X2X, touch screen See page 381
Set Power Panel PP420 compact X2X; 5.7'' QVGA color TFT; 128 MB SDRAM;
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP451:0571-L25 Power Panel PP451 light color LCD, CAN, keys See page 386
512 KB SRAM.
4PP451:0571-L65 Power Panel PP451 light color LCD, X2X, keys See page 386
512 KB SRAM.
4PP451:0571-L35 Power Panel PP451 light color TFT, CAN, keys See page 386
512 KB SRAM.
4PP451:0571-L75 Power Panel PP451 light color TFT, X2X, keys See page 386
512 KB SRAM.
Table 7: Model number overview - Power Panel light / compact devices

General information
4PP451:0571-C25 Power Panel PP451 compact color LCD, CAN, keys See page 390
Chapter 1
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP451:0571-C65 Power Panel PP451 compact color LCD, X2X, keys See page 390
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP451:0571-C35 Power Panel PP451 compact color TFT, CAN, keys See page 390
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP451:0571-C75 Power Panel PP451 compact color TFT, X2X, keys See page 390
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP452:0571-L25 Power Panel PP452 light color LCD, CAN, keys See page 394
256 kB SRAM
4PP452:0571-L65 Power Panel PP452 light color LCD, X2X, keys See page 394
512 kB SRAM
4PP452:0571-L35 Power Panel PP452 light color TFT, CAN, keys See page 394
256 kB SRAM
4PP452:0571-L75 Power Panel PP452 light color TFT, X2X, keys See page 394
512 kB SRAM
4PP452:0571-C25 Power Panel PP452 compact color LCD, CAN, keys See page 398
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP452:0571-C65 Power Panel PP452 compact color LCD, X2X, keys See page 398
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP452:0571-C35 Power Panel PP452 compact color TFT, CAN, keys See page 398
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
4PP452:0571-C75 Power Panel PP452 compact color TFT, X2X, keys See page 398
512 KB SRAM; ETH 10/100.
Table 7: Model number overview - Power Panel light / compact devices (Forts.)
5.5 Software

5SWWCE.0521-ENG WinCE5.0 Pro PP300 LX800 See page 485
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English; for PP300 BIOS devices 5PP320.0571-29,
5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39, 5PP320.1505-39,
order CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0621-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus PP300 LX800 See page 485
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional Plus, English; for PP300 BIOS devices
5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
5PP320.1505-39, order CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
Table 8: Model number overview - Software


Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 Professional, English, including license; for PP300 BIOS devices
5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
5SWWXP.0421-ENG WinXPe FP2007 PP300 LX800 See page 489
Microsoft Windows XP embedded, English, Feature Pack 2007; for PP300 BIOS devices
5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
5PP320.1505-39, order CompactFlash separately (at least 512 MB). Only delivered with a
new Power Panel.
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English; for Power Panel 400 BIOS;
Order CompactFlash separately (min.128 MB).
5SWWCE.0622-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus PP400 LX800 See page 485
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional plus, English; for Power Panel 400 BIOS;
5SWWXP.0422-ENG WinXPe FP2007 PP400 LX800 See page 489
Microsoft Windows XP Embedded Feature Pack 2007, English; for Power Panel 400;
5SWWXP.0721-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 PP300 LX800 See page 491
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded, Standard 2009, English; for Power Panel 300; order
CompactFlash separately (at least 1 GB).
5SWWXP.0722-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 PP400 LX800 See page 491
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded Standard 2009, English; for Power Panel 400;
Order CompactFlash separately (min.1 GByte).
Table 8: Model number overview - Software (Forts.)
5.6 Accessories

0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs. See page 521
Lithium batteries, 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 pc. See page 521
Lithium battery, 1 pc., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
0TB103.9 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin screw clamp See page 523
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Screw clamps, 3.31 mm, protected against vibration by the
screw flange
0TB103.91 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin cage clamp See page 523
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Cage clamps, 3.31 mm, protected against vibration by the
screw flange
5AC900.057X-00 Legend strips 3x 5.7" vertical1 See page 525
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP451.0571-65. For 3 devices.
5AC900.057X-01 Legend strips 2x 5.7" Horizontal2 See page 525
5AC900.104X-00 Legend strip 1x 10.4" Vertical1 See page 525
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP451.1043-75 and 4PP481.1043-B5. For 1 device.
Table 9: Model number overview - Accessories

General information
5AC900.104X-01 Legend strip 1x 10.4" Horizontal2 See page 525
Chapter 1
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP482.1043-75. For 1 device.
5AC900.104X-02 Legend strips 3x 10.4" Horizontal1 See page 525
5AC900.150X-00 Legend strips 4x 15" See page 525
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP481.1505-75, 4PP480.1505-75. For 4 devices.
5CFCRD.0512-04 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R See page 527
CompactFlash card with 512 MB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.016G-04 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R See page 527
CompactFlash card with 16 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI See page 532
5MMUSB.2048-00 USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk See page 536
USB 2.0 flash drive 2 GB
5MMUSB.2048-01 USB flash drive 2 GB B&R See page 536

9A0017.01 RS232 DB9 null modem cable 0.6 m See page 541
Null modem cable RS232 0.6 m to connect UPS and IPC (9-pin DSUB socket - 9-pin DSUB
socket)
9A0017.02 RS232 DB9 null modem cable 1.8 m See page 541
socket)
5SWHMI.0000-00 HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD See page 543
Table 9: Model number overview - Accessories (Forts.)


Technical data General information
Chapter 2 Technical data
1. General information
Technical data
Chapter 2
The new Power Panel 300/400 generation is an addition to the proven Power Panel 100/200
product line. With more than twice the computing power, the new generation covers a
performance range that was previously reserved for industrial PCs.
For the Power Panel 300 and the Power Panel 400, B&R also implements the proven product
lines of BIOS devices (Power Panel 300) and embedded devices (Power Panel 300 and Power
Panel 400). Power Panel 300 devices can be delivered with the Windows XP embedded and
Windows CE operating systems. They cover the entire range of PC systems, from simple thin
clients and web terminals to full SCADA systems. Power Panel 300 and Power Panel 400
devices handle the automation of complete systems. This provides integrated control
functionality and drive technology together with modular interfaces for connecting peripheral
devices for the process. Models ranging from 5.7" QVGA to 15" XGA meet all requirements for
series machine manufacturing. There is now a new variant that combines a 5.7" diagonal with a
VGA TFT display. It allows a great deal of information to be displayed in a small amount of space
and images can be shown is detail. Entries are made using either the touch screen or the
function keys.
Figure 1: Power Panel 300 and Power Panel 400 devices

1.1 Features
24 VDC supply voltage

2 USB 2.0 connections
Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface
CompactFlash card (type I) slot
RS232 interface, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
2 operating mode switches (2 x 16 digit)
2 status LEDs (User or CompactFlash card access)
ATX power supply compatibility
Power button
Fan-free operation
Touch screen (analog resistive), function keys for both1)
Horizontal and vertical mounting orientations, numeric and alphanumeric keys1)
Maximum 2 aPCI slots (see B&R System 2005 User's Manual for available aPCI interface
modules)1)
BIOS (Windows XP Embedded, Windows CE 5.0 or 6.0) or Automation Runtime
operating system1)
Real-time clock (battery-buffered)1)
Up to 512 MB SDRAM main memory1)
1) Depending on the design of the Power Panel device version.

1.2 Differences between Power Panel 300/400 and Power Panel 100/200
1.2.1 Electrical
More powerful processor (Geode LX800 = more than twice the performance)
180 rotated power supply plug
Insyde BIOS
Power button
Technical data
ATX compatible power supply
Chapter 2
USB 2.0 support
Different network controller
MTCX controller
Lower power consumption
1.2.2 Mechanical
Mechanically mounting compatible (see "Mounting compatibilities", on page 561) - but

connections are not compatible (locations of interfaces, plugs, and keys have changed).
Power Panel 100/200 Power Panel 300/400

102.2
127.5
149.1
158.3
168.8
77.2
88.5
104.7
150.9
158.3
168.8
55.5
34.4
42.5
83.9
132
36
0
59
0
36.2 34.7 35.2

33.9 31.7 35.9 33.7
32.1 30.7 35 33.4
31.2 29.6 32.5 32.9
30.9 29 30.7
28.2 27.2 28.6
0 0 0 0
Figure 2: Different plug and key positions (PP100/200 - PP300/400)

1.3 Temperature sensor locations
Sensors show temperature values in a variety of locations (USB ports, main memory) in the
PP500. The temperatures1) can be read in the Microsoft Windows operating systems and
Automation Runtime, using B&R Control Center2) .
Figure 3: Temperature sensor locations
Position Measurement Monitoring Max. specified

point for
1 CPU Processor temperature (sensor integrated on the processor). 90C
2 ENV Baseboard temperature near the MTCX and Ethernet controller. 80C
Table 10: Temperature sensor locations
1) The measured temperature is a guideline for the immediate ambient temperature, but can be influenced by neighboring components.
2) The B&R Control Center - ADI driver - can be downloaded for free from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).

Technical data Power Panel 300 with BIOS
2. Power Panel 300 with BIOS
2.1 Device interfaces
The following section provides a description of all interfaces and plugs possible with a
PowerPanel 300 device with BIOS.
2.1.1 Supply voltage
Technical data
Input voltage: 18 - 30 VDC
Chapter 2
The 3-pin socket required for the supply voltage connection is not included in delivery. This can
be ordered from B&R using the model number 0TB103.9 (screw clamp) or 0TB103.91 (cage
clamp).
Pin assignment information can be found either in the following table or printed on the Power
Panel plate. The supply voltage is internally protected so that the device cannot be damaged if
there is an overload (fuse replacement necessary) or if the voltage supply is connected
incorrectly (reverse polarity protection - fuse replacement not necessary).
Supply voltage
Protected against reverse polarity
Pin Description
1 +
2 Functional ground
3 2 1
3 -
Accessories
0TB103.9 Plug 24 V 5.08 3-pin screw clamp
0TB103.91 Plug 24 V 5.08 3-pin cage clamp
Figure 4: Supply voltage connection
Ground
Warning!
The pin's connection to the functional ground (pin 2) should be as short as possible
(e.g. in the control cabinet). We recommend using the largest possible conductor
cross section on the supply plug.

2.1.2 Functional grounding clip
A functional grounding clip is located next to the supply voltage plug. The grounding clip
(functional ground) must be connected with a central grounding point on the control cabinet using
a 6.3 mm blade connector via the shortest distance and with as little resistance as possible (e.g.
copper strip, but must be at least 2.5 mm).
Grounding clip
Figure 5: Functional grounding clip

2.1.3 Serial interface COM
The Power Panel is equipped with a PC-compatible serial interface with a 16-byte FIFO buffer.
This non-electrically isolated interface is primarily intended for programming Power Panel
devices using Automation Studio.
The RS232 can also be used as a general interface (e.g. third-party connections, barcode
reader, etc.).
Serial interface COM
Technical data
Type RS232, modem-capable, not
Chapter 2
electrically isolated
UART 16C550 compatible, 16-byte
FIFO
Transfer rate Up to 115 kBaud 9-pin DSUB plug
Pin Assignment
1 DCD
1 5
2 RxD
3 TxD 6 9
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
Table 11 : Pin assignments - COM

2.1.4 USB ports
The Power Panel 300/400 devices have a USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) host controller with
multiple USB ports, two of which are on the outside for easy user access.
Universal serial bus

Transfer rate1) Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), Full Speed 2x USB Type A, female
(12 Mbit/s) to high speed (480 Mbit/s)
Power supply Max. 500 mA per port2)
Maximum 5 m (not including hub)
Cable length
Table 12: USB ports
1) The actual value depends on the operating system or driver being used.
2) For safety, every USB port is equipped with a maintenance free "USB current-limiting circuit breaker" (max. 500 mA)
Warning!
Peripheral USB devices can be connected to the USB ports. Due to the vast number
of USB devices available on the market, B&R cannot guarantee their performance.
B&R does ensure the performance of all USB devices that they provide.
Warning!
Because of general PC specifications, these interfaces should be handled with
extreme care with regard to EMC, location of cables, etc.

2.1.5 Mode/Node switches
Power Panel devices are equipped with 2 hex switches that serve as operating mode switches.
Switch positions 01 to FD are available for any purpose in an application and can be evaluated
by the application program.
Mode/Node switches
Technical data
Chapter 2
SW1 SW2
Table 13: Mode/Node switches
Switch position
SW1 (x16) SW2 (x1) Function Description
0 0 Service mode Necessary for restoring the default BIOS settings - for more information, see section
"Restoring the default BIOS values", on page 461.
x x None No other switch positions have significance.
Table 14: Switch settings for the Mode/Node switch

2.1.6 BIOS boot mode switch
Power Panel devices are equipped with a BIOS boot mode switch.
AR
-M
od
e
OS
-M
od
e
Figure 6: BIOS boot mode switch
Switch position Function Description

Right (toward CF slot) OS mode The Power Panel will boot in OS mode.
Left AR mode The Power Panel will boot in AR mode.
Table 15: BIOS boot mode switch positions (based on the image)
Warning!
Carefully use a pointed object to change switch position.

OS mode
Standard Boot Screen (see section 1 "Power Panel 300 with BIOS", on page 413)
BIOS Setup can be started by pressing the "DEL" key.
When the switch is in the "00" position, the setup default values will be restored after
restarting three times.
AR mode
Technical data
The device will be initialized for Automation Runtime when AR mode is enabled.
Chapter 2
Other boot screen (see section 2 "Power Panel 300/400 with Automation Runtime", on
page 466)
USB Boot "Enabled" (only in switch position "00")1)
2.1.7 Status LEDs
Power Panels are equipped with two status LEDs that are visible on the outside.
Status LEDs
LED Color Meaning
Green On Supply voltage OK 1x three-color, 1x one-color
The system is in standby mode
Power (S5: soft-off mode or S4:
Red On
hibernate mode - suspend-to-
disk)
Yellow On Can be used as desired by the
user (for example, can be
User switched on/off directly using
Green Off the ADI library - only possible
in S0 state)
Indicates access to
CF Yellow On CompactFlash drive (read or
write)
Table 16: Status LEDs

2.1.8 Ethernet interface
Ethernet interface
Controller Intel 82551ER RJ45 twisted pair (10BaseT/100BaseT), female
Cabling S/STP (category 5)
Transfer rate 10/100 Mbit/s 1)
LED On Off
Green 100 Mbit/s 10 Mbit/s
Orange Link Activity (blinking)
(Ethernet network (Data transfer in
connection progress)
available)
Table 17: Ethernet interface
1) Both operating modes possible. Switching takes place automatically.

2.1.9 Power button
Due to the complete ATX power supply support, the power button serves a number of functions,
which can be configured in BIOS setup.
Power button
The power button can be pressed with a pointed object (e.g.

paper clip or tip of a pen).
Technical data
The power button acts like the on/off switch on a normal
Chapter 2
desktop PC with ATX power supply:
press and release ... turn on or shut down operating system.
Press and hold ... ATX power supply switches off without
shutting down the Power Panel (data could be lost!).
Pressing the power button does not reset the MTCX

processor.
not reset.
Table 18: Power button
2.1.10 Reset button
Reset button
The reset button can be pressed with a pointed object (e.g.

Pushing the reset button results in a hardware-reset. This

restarts the Power Panel.
The MTCX processor is not reset when the reset button is

pressed.
Table 19: Reset button
Warning!
A system reset can result in data loss!

2.1.11 CompactFlash slot
Power Panel devices are equipped with a CompactFlash slot that is accessible from the side.
Type I CompactFlash cards are supported.
Ejection lever
Safety latch
Figure 7: CompactFlash slot
It is possible to secure the CompactFlash slot using the latch provided. By pressing the ejector
(using a pointed object is the best way to do this), the CompactFlash card can be changed
quickly and safely.
Caution!
The power must be turned off before inserting or removing the CompactFlash card!
As a safety measure, a sticker is also attached to Power Panel devices stating this.

2.2 Stickers
2.2.1 Device label
The following sticker can be found in a suitable location on the Power Panel device:
Technical data
Chapter 2
Figure 8: Device label
2.2.2 Serial number sticker
General information
Each B&R device is given a unique serial number sticker with a barcode that allows the device
to be clearly identified.
Design / dimensions
60 mm
R2
5PP320.1505-39 Rev. R0
14 mm
91700168425
www.br-automation.com
MAC: 00-60-65-04-4C-09
Model number Revision Standards met
5PP320.1505-39 Rev. R0
Serial number 91700168425

MAC: 00-60-65-04-4C-09
MAC address Barcode type 128
Figure 9: Design/dimensions - Serial number sticker

Information on the Internet
Information about each device can also be found on the B&R homepage. Enter the device's
serial number in the serial number search field on the start page www.br-automation.com. The
search also works if you enter the model number or the material number in the material number
search field.
Enter model number here

e.g. 5PP320.0571-29
Figure 10: Example - Material number search: 5PP320.0571-29

2.3 Device 5PP320.0571-29
Technical data
Chapter 2
Figure 11: Front view - 5PP320.0571-29
Battery compartment
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
voltage USB CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)
Figure 12: Rear view - 5PP320.0571-29

2.3.1 Technical data
Features 5PP320.0571-29
B&R ID code 0x23CE
Boot loader / Operating system BIOS
Processor
Type Geode LX800 500 MHz, 32-bit x86
Expanded command set MMX technology, 3D Now
L1 cache 128 kB (64 kB I-Cache / 64 kB D-Cache)
L2 cache 128 kB
Floating point unit (FPU) Yes
Cooling
Method Passive (heat sink)
Flash 2 MB (for firmware)
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 256 MB
Graphics
Controller Geode LX800
Memory 8 MB shared memory (reserved by main memory)
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
Remanent variables for AR
(Automation Runtime) in power fail
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Real-time clock (RTC)
Battery-buffered Yes
Accuracy at +25C typically 30 ppm (2.5 seconds) 2) per day
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Removable Yes, accessible from the outside
Service life 4 years3)
Backup capacitor (for changing battery)
Buffer time 10 minutes
Ethernet
Controller Intel 82551ER
Transfer rate 10/100 Mbit/s
Connection RJ45 twisted pair (10 Base T / 100 Base T)
Cables S/STP (category 5)
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Connection Primary IDE device
Table 20: Technical data - 5PP320.0571-29

Serial interface
Type RS232, modem-capable, not electrically isolated
UART 16C550 compatible, 16-byte FIFO
Transfer rate Max. 115 kBaud
Connection 9-pin DSUB
USB interface
Type USB 1.1, USB 2.04)
Amount 2
Transfer rate Low speed (1.5 Mbit/s), full speed (12 Mbit/s), to high speed (480 Mbit/s)4)
Connection Type A
Technical data
Current load Max. 500 mA per connection
Chapter 2
Reset button Yes, accessible from the outside
Power button Yes, accessible from the outside
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
1x combined power (red/green) and user (yellow)
Mode/Node switch 2, 16 digits each
aPCI slots -
Holding torque for aPCI module
Display
Type Color LCD
Diagonal 5.7 in (144 mm)
Colors 512 colors4)
Resolution QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels
Contrast 40:1
Viewing angle (see page 560)
Horizontal Direction R / direction L = 40
Vertical Direction U = 40/ direction D = 50
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 200 cd/m
Half-brightness time5) 50000 hours
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section "Screen rotation", on page 410
Touch screen
Touch screen type Gunze
Technology Analog, resistive
Controller Elo, serial, 12- bit
Degree of transmission Up to 80% 5%
Filter glass -
Degree of transmission
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness
Table 20: Technical data - 5PP320.0571-29 (Forts.)

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.0571-29

Power supply
Rated voltage 18 - 30 VDC
Rated current 0.45 A
Starting current Max. 1.2 A
Power consumption Typically 10 W
Electrical isolation Yes
Bleeder resistance 0
Mechanical characteristics
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Frame Naturally anodized aluminum6)
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Dark gray border around display Similar to Pantone 432CV6)
Light background Similar to Pantone 427CV6)
Gasket Flat gasket around display front
Housing Metal
Weight Approx. 1.4 kg
Environmental characteristics
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Bearings -20 to +60C
Transport -20 to +60C
Relative humidity See 2.3.2 "Temperature humidity diagram", on page 61
Vibration
Operation (continuous) 2 - 9 Hz: 1.75 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 0.5 g
Operation (occasional) 2 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude / 9 - 200 Hz: 1 g
Bearings 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Transport 2 - 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude / 8 - 200 Hz: 2 g / 200 - 500 Hz: 4 g
Shock
Operation 15 g, 11 ms
Bearings 30 g, 15 ms
Transport 30 g, 15 ms
Protection IP20 back side (only with installed CompactFlash card)
IP65 / NEMA 250 type 4X, dust and sprayed water protection (front side)
Altitude7) Max. 3000 m
1) Maintenance controller extended.

2) At max. specified ambient temperature: typically 50 ppm (4 seconds) - worst-case 100 ppm (8 seconds).
3) Typical lifespan (at 50% buffer operation, temperature +25C when off, +50C when on).
Maximum life cycle in 24-hour operation (no buffer) 6 years at +25C or 5 years at +50C.
Maximum lifespan switched off: 2 years at +25C or 1 year at +50C.
5) At +25C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can result in an approximate 50% increase of the half-brightness time.
6) Depending on the process or batch, there may be visible deviations in the color and surface structure.
7) Derating the maximum ambient temperature - typically 1C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).

2.3.2 Temperature humidity diagram
100
95
90
85
Relative humidity [%RH] (non-condensing)
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 13: Temperature humidity diagram - 5PP320.0571-29
2.3.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196
3 46.5 6
Nominal measurement General tolerance from

range DIN ISO 2768 medium
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 6 to 30 mm 0.2 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212
Figure 14: Dimensions - 5PP320.0571-29

2.3.4 Cutout installation
The cutout hole is to be made according to the following dimensions for cutout installation. The
device must be mounted using the retaining clips included in delivery.
Outer contour (Power Panel)
156
149.5
Cutout
Cutout dimensions 199 0.5 mm x 143 0.5 mm

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Figure 15: Cutout installation - 5PP320.0571-29
2.3.5 Contents of delivery
The following components are included in the delivery of the Power Panel device:
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7in QVGA, touch screen
4 Retaining clips included
1 Lithium battery 3 V / 950 mAh included
Table 21: Contents of delivery - 5PP320.0571-29

2.4 Device 5PP320.0571-39
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)

Features 5PP320.0571-39 Rev. C0 5PP320.0571-39 Rev. D0 5PP320.0571-39 Rev. F0

B&R ID code 0xA15D
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 256 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Type Color TFT Color TFT
Diagonal 5.7 in (144 mm) 5.7 in (144 mm)
Colors 262144 colors4) 262144 colors4)
Resolution QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels
Contrast 400:1 350:1
Horizontal Direction R / direction L = 60 Direction R / direction L = 65
Vertical Direction U = 40/ direction D = Direction U = 65/ direction D = 40
50
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Brightness 500 cd/m 500 cd/m
Half-brightness time5) 50000 hours 50000 hours
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 Yes, see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section "Screen rotation", on
"Commissioning", section page 410
"Screen rotation", on page 410
Touch screen
Touch screen type Gunze AMT
Technology Analog, resistive Analog, resistive
Controller Elo, serial, 12- bit Elo, serial, 12- bit
Degree of transmission Up to 80% 5% Up to 80% 5%
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.0571-39 Rev. C0 5PP320.0571-39 Rev. D0 5PP320.0571-39 Rev. F0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
2.4.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196
3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7in QVGA, touch screen

2.5 Device 5PP320.0573-39
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)

Features 5PP320.0573-39 D0 5PP320.0573-39 E0

B&R ID code 0x23CF
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 256 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 5PP320.0573-39 D0 5PP320.0573-39 E0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Type Color TFT
Colors 262144 colors4)
Resolution VGA, 640 x 480 pixels
Contrast 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 350 cd/m
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.0573-39 D0 5PP320.0573-39 E0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
2.5.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196
3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7" VGA, touch screen

2.6 Device 5PP320.0573-3B
Technical data
Chapter 2
Figure 26: Front view - 5PP320.0573-3B
Battery compartment
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)
Figure 27: Rear view - 5PP320.0573-3B

Features 5PP320.0573-3B D0 5PP320.0573-3B E0

B&R ID code 0xA5A6
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 512 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Table 26: Technical data - 5PP320.0573-3B

Features 5PP320.0573-3B D0 5PP320.0573-3B E0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Type Color TFT
Contrast 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 350 cd/m
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness
Table 26: Technical data - 5PP320.0573-3B (Forts.)

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.0573-3B D0 5PP320.0573-3B E0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 28: Temperature humidity diagram - 5PP320.0573-3B
2.6.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196
3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 30 to120 mm 0.3 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212
Figure 29: Dimensions - 5PP320.0573-3B

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Figure 30: Cutout installation - 5PP320.0573-3B
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 5.7" VGA, touch screen
Table 27: Contents of delivery - 5PP320.0573-3B

2.7 Device 5PP320.1043-39
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
Grounding clip
Power button CompactFlash slot

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
COM LEDs

Features 5PP320.1043-39 E0 5PP320.1043-39 F0 5PP320.1043-39 I0

B&R ID code 0x23D0
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 256 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Resolution VGA, 640 x 480 pixels VGA, 640 x 480 pixels
Vertical Direction U = 45/ direction D = 35 Direction U / direction D = 80
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section "Screen rotation", on Yes, see chapter 3
page 410 "Commissioning", section
Touch screen
Touch screen type Elo Accu Touch AMT
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.1043-39 E0 5PP320.1043-39 F0 5PP320.1043-39 I0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Depth 65.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
2.7.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 300 3 54.5 8

82
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
260
240
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
100
10
323 27.5

260
251.5
Cutout
Cutout dimensions 303 mm 0.5 mm x 243 mm 0.5 mm

for
4PP320.1043-31
4PP420.1043-75
4PP420.1043-B5
4PP480.1043-75
5PP320.1043-39
8.5
0
323
0
313
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 10.4in VGA, touch screen

2.8 Device 5PP320.1214-39
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
Grounding clip

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
COM LEDs

Features 5PP320.1214-39 F0 5PP320.1214-39 G0 5PP320.1214-39 H0

B&R ID code 0x23D1
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 256 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 5PP320.1214-39 F0 5PP320.1214-39 G0 5PP320.1214-39 H0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Resolution SVGA, 800 x 600 pixels SVGA, 800 x 600 pixels
Vertical Direction U = 50/ direction D = 60 Direction U = 60/ direction D =
80
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.1214-39 F0 5PP320.1214-39 G0 5PP320.1214-39 H0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 362 mm
Height 284 mm
Depth 65.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +45C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
2.8.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
10 342 3 54.5 8

82

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
284
264
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
123.9
10
362 27.5

284
275.5
Cutout
for 5PP320.1214-39
8.5
0
362
8.5
353.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 12.1in SVGA, touch screen

2.9 Device 5PP320.1505-39
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
Grounding clip

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
LEDs
COM

Features 5PP320.1505-39 F0 5PP320.1505-39 G0 5PP320.1505-39 I0

B&R ID code 0x23D2
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 256 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Diagonal 15 in (381 mm) 15 in (381 mm)
Colors 16.7 million colors4) 16.2 million colors4)
Resolution XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels XGA, 1024 x 768 pixels
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Vertical Direction U / direction D = 85 Direction U / direction D = 85
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.1505-39 F0 5PP320.1505-39 G0 5PP320.1505-39 I0

Power supply
Starting current Max. 2 A
Outer dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Depth 71.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
2.9.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 60.5 8
82

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
309
330
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 28.5

330
321
Cutout

for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 15in XGA, touch screen

2.10 Device 5PP320.1505-3B
Technical data
Chapter 2
Figure 46: Front view - 5PP320.1505-3B
Battery compartment
Grounding clip

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
LEDs
COM
Figure 47: Rear view - 5PP320.1505-3B

Features 5PP320.1505-3B D0 5PP320.1505-3B E0 5PP320.1505-3B F0

B&R ID code 0xB2C5
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 512 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Table 34: Technical data - 5PP320.1505-3B

Features 5PP320.1505-3B D0 5PP320.1505-3B E0 5PP320.1505-3B F0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 5PP320.1505-3B D0 5PP320.1505-3B E0 5PP320.1505-3B F0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Depth 71.5 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 48: Temperature humidity diagram - 5PP320.1505-3B
2.10.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 60.5 8
82

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
309
330
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 28.5
Figure 49: Dimensions - 5PP320.1505-3B

330
321
Cutout

for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Figure 50: Cutout installation - 5PP320.1505-3B
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 BIOS 15in XGA, touch screen
Table 35: Contents of delivery - 5PP320.1505-3B

Technical data Power Panel 300 with Automation Runtime
3. Power Panel 300 with Automation Runtime
Power Panel 300 device with Automation Runtime.
Technical data
Chapter 2
clamp).
Supply voltage
Pin Description
1 +
2 Functional ground
3 2 1
3 -
Accessories
0TB103.9 Plug 24 V 5.08 3p screw clamps
0TB103.91 Plug 24 V 5.08 3p cage clamps
Ground
Warning!

Grounding clip

reader, etc.).
Technical data
Chapter 2
FIFO
Pin Assignment
1 DCD
1 5
2 RxD
3 TxD 6 9
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

3.1.4 USB ports

Cable length
Table 37: USB ports
Warning!
Warning!

Mode/Node switches
Technical data
Chapter 2
SW1 SW2
Switch position
0 0 Boot Automation Runtime boot mode for operating system (firmware, BIOS) upgrade (default:
Automation Runtime).
In this position, a new or missing operating system can be downloaded.
Information:
For detailed information, see chapter 4 "Software" section. 3 "Upgrade
information", on page 470
0 ... F 0 ... D Node Automation Runtime run mode with node 01-FD (CompactFlash Automation Runtime or
terminal operation).
Freely available for use in an application, e.g. setting the INA2000 node number for the
Ethernet interface.
F E Dyn. Mode Automation Runtime run mode with node 01-FD (CompactFlash Automation Runtime or
Device addresses can be assigned through the software.
F F Diagnostics Automation Runtime diagnostics mode (CompactFlash Automation Runtime or terminal
operation).

AR
-M
od
e
OS
-M
od
e

Warning!

OS mode
AR mode
Technical data
Chapter 2
page 466)

3.1.7 Status LEDs
Status LEDs
LED Color Meaning
Red On
disk)
in S0 state)
Indicates access to
write)
Ethernet interface
LED On Off
available)

3.1.9 Power button
Power button

If the Power button is pushed, the Power Panel is switched

off and remains in Standby mode.
Technical data
Chapter 2
3.1.10 Reset button
Reset button



pressed.
Warning!

Ejection lever
Safety latch
quickly and safely.
Caution!

3.2 Stickers
3.2.1 Device label
Technical data
Chapter 2
General information
Design / dimensions
60 mm
R2
4PP420.1043-75 Rev. R0
14 mm
91490168421
MAC: 00-60-65-00-C6-A7
4PP420.1043-75 Rev. R0

MAC: 00-60-65-00:C6:A7

search field.

e.g. 4PP320.1043-01

3.3 Device 4PP320.0571-01
Technical data
Chapter 2
CompactFlash Slot
(mit Verriegelung)
Erdungslasche
Power Taster SW2

(x1)
Reset Taster
SW1
Spannungs-
(x16)
versorgung
USB Status
LEDs
Ethernet
COM

Features 4PP320.0571-01 Rev. E0 4PP320.0571-01 Rev. F0 4PP320.0571-01 Rev. I0

B&R ID code 0xA15E
Boot loader / Operating system Automation Runtime
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Type Monochrome LCD Monochrome LCD
Colors 8 shades of gray3) 8 shades of gray3)
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting LED

Type CCFL 150 cd/m
Brightness 220 cd/m 40000 hours
Half-brightness time4) 50000 hours Yes, see chapter 3
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section "Screen rotation", on "Commissioning", section
page 410 "Screen rotation", on page 410
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP320.0571-01 Rev. E0 4PP320.0571-01 Rev. F0 4PP320.0571-01 Rev. I0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray5)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.3.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196
3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 5.7in QVGA, touch screen

3.4 Device 4PP320.0571-35
Technical data
Chapter 2
CompactFlash Slot
(mit Verriegelung)
Erdungslasche
Power Taster SW2

(x1)
Reset Taster
SW1
Spannungs-
(x16)
versorgung
USB Status
LEDs
Ethernet
COM

Features 4PP320.0571-35 C0 4PP320.0571-35 F0

B&R ID code 0xA15F
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP320.0571-35 C0 4PP320.0571-35 F0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Type Color TFT
Contrast 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 500 cd/m
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP320.0571-35 C0 4PP320.0571-35 F0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray5)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.4.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196
3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

3.5 Device 4PP320.1043-31
Technical data
Chapter 2
Grounding
clip
CompactFlash slot
Power button (with latch)
Reset button
SW2
Supply
(x1)
voltage
SW1
USB (x16)
Ethernet Status
COM LEDs


B&R ID code 0xA160
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP320.1043-31 E0 4PP320.1043-31 F0 4PP320.1043-31 I0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Depth 65.5 mm
Front
Design Gray5)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.5.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 300 3 54.5 8

82
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
260
240
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
100
10
323 27.5

260
251.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.1043-31
4PP420.1043-75
4PP420.1043-B5
4PP480.1043-75
5PP320.1043-39
8.5
0
323
0
313
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 10.4in VGA, touch screen

3.6 Device 4PP320.1505-31
Technical data
Chapter 2
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding
clip
Power button SW2
(x1)
Reset button
SW1
Supply
(x16)
voltage
USB Status
LEDs
Ethernet
COM


B&R ID code 0xA17F
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP320.1505-31 F0 4PP320.1505-31 G0 4PP320.1505-31 I0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Depth 71.5 mm
Front
Design Gray5)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.6.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 60.5 8
82

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
309
330
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 28.5

330
321
Cutout

for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP320 15in XGA, touch screen

3.7 Device 4PP351.0571-01
Technical data
Chapter 2
Keys can be Keys can be
labeled using labeled using
legend strips legend strips
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs

Features 4PP351.0571-01 Rev. I0 4PP351.0571-01 Rev. H0

B&R ID code 0xA543
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP351.0571-01 Rev. I0 4PP351.0571-01 Rev. H0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting
CCFL LED
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section Yes, see chapter 3 "Commissioning", section
"Screen rotation", on page 410 "Screen rotation", on page 410
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED
Function keys 16 with LED (yellow)
Soft keys 6 with LED (yellow)
Cursor keys 5 without LED
Number block 15 without LED
Other keys -
Key lifespan > 106 actuations with 1 0.3 to 3 0.3 N operating force
LED brightness Typ. 12 mcd (yellow) and 20 mcd (green)
Pressing more than one key at a time may result in so-called phantom keys,
and may trigger unintended actions.

Electrical characteristics 4PP351.0571-01 Rev. I0 4PP351.0571-01 Rev. H0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Orange keys Similar to Pantone 151CV7)
Dark gray keys Similar to Pantone 431CV7)
Legend strips (gray) Similar to Pantone 429CV7)
Housing Metal
Weight Approx. 2 kg
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.7.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
8 196 3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Cutout
Cutout dimensions 199 0.5 mm x 226.8 0.5 mm

for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP351 5.7in QVGA

3.8 Device 4PP351.0571-35
Technical data
Chapter 2
Grounding clip
Power button
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs

Features 4PP351.0571-35 Rev. C0 4PP351.0571-35 Rev. D0

B&R ID code 0xA541
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Colors 2621443) 262144 colors3)
Vertical Direction U = 40/ direction D = 50 Direction U = 65/ direction D = 40
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP351.0571-35 Rev. C0 4PP351.0571-35 Rev. D0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Weight Approx. 2 kg
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.8.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
8 196 3 46.5 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Cutout

for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

3.9 Device 4PP352.0571-35
Technical data
Chapter 2
Keys can be labeled using legend strips
Grounding clip CompactFlash slot

Power button (with latch)
Reset button
Supply
voltage USB
Ethernet
COM
Status SW2
LEDs SW1
(x1)
(x16)


B&R ID code 0xA542
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED
Soft keys -
Other keys -
6

Electrical characteristics 4PP352.0571-35 Rev. C0 4PP352.0571-35 Rev. D0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 302 mm
Height 187 mm
Depth 55.5 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.9.3 Dimensions
2.9 11.9
8 286
3 46.5 6
Nominal measurement General tolerance

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
171
187

over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
113
8
302

187
180.5
Cutout

for
4PP352.0571-35
4PP452.0571-45
4PP452.0571-65
4PP452.0571-75
4PP452.0571-B5
6.5
0
302
6.5
295.5
0
Amount Component

3.10 Device 4PP381.1043-31
Technical data
Chapter 2
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding clip
Power button
SW2
Reset button (x1)
Supply SW1
voltage USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM

Features 4PP381.1043-31 F0 4PP381.1043-31 G0 4PP381.1043-31 J0

B&R ID code 0xA544
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM -
Size
Battery-buffered
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time -
Battery-buffered -
Battery -
Type
Removable
Service life
Buffer time
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots -
Display
Colors 262144 colors 262144 colors
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP381.1043-31 F0 4PP381.1043-31 G0 4PP381.1043-31 J0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 358 mm
Depth 65.5 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
3.10.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 300 3 54.5 8

81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
over 30 to120 mm 0.3 mm
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
358
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm

333
193
15
323 27.5

358
349.5
Cutout

for
4PP381.1043-31
4PP451.1043-75
4PP451.1043-B5
4PP481.1043-75
4PP481.1043-B5
13.5
0
0
10
313
323
Amount Component

4. Power Panel 400 with Automation Runtime
Power Panel 400 device with Automation Runtime.
Technical data
Chapter 2
clamp).
Supply voltage
Pin Description
1 +
2 Functional ground
3 2 1
3 -
Accessories
0TB103.9 Plug 24 V 5.08 3p screw clamps
0TB103.91 Plug 24 V 5.08 3p cage clamps
Ground
Warning!

Grounding clip

reader, etc.).
Technical data
Chapter 2
FIFO
Pin Assignment
1 DCD
1 5
2 RxD
3 TxD 6 9
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

4.1.4 USB ports

Cable length
Table 62: USB ports
Warning!
Warning!

Mode/Node switches
Technical data
Chapter 2
SW1 SW2
Switch position
0 0 Boot Automation Runtime boot mode for operating system (firmware, BIOS) upgrade (default:
Automation Runtime).
In this position, a new or missing operating system can be downloaded.
Information:
For detailed information, see chapter 4 "Software" section3 "Upgrade
information", on page 470.
0 ... F 0 ... D Node Automation Runtime run mode with node 01-FD (CompactFlash Automation Runtime or
Freely available for CompactFlash users, e.g. setting the INA2000 node number for the
Ethernet interface.
F E Dyn. Mode Automation Runtime run mode with node 01-FD (CompactFlash Automation Runtime or
Device addresses can be assigned through the software.
F F Diagnostics Automation Runtime diagnostics mode (CompactFlash Automation Runtime or terminal
operation).

AR
-M
od
e
OS
-M
od
e

Warning!

OS mode
AR mode
Technical data
Chapter 2
page 466)

4.1.7 Status LEDs
Status LEDs
LED Color Meaning
Red On
disk)
in S0 state)
Indicates access to
write)
Ethernet interface
LED On Off
available)

4.1.9 Power button
Power button

If the Power button is pushed, the Power Panel is switched

off and remains in Standby mode.
Technical data
Chapter 2
4.1.10 Reset button
Reset button



pressed.
Warning!

Ejection lever
Safety latch
quickly and safely.
Caution!
4.1.12 aPCI Slot(s)
Either 1 or 2 aPCI slots are available depending on the Power Panel variant. B&R System 2005
aPCI interface modules can be inserted (available aPCI interface modules - see B&R homepage
- Products - Control systems - System 2005 - Communication modules).
aPCI
Slot
2
aPC
I Slo
t1
Figure 102: aPCI Slot(s)

4.2 Stickers
4.2.1 Device label
Technical data
Chapter 2
General information
Design / dimensions
60 mm
R2
4PP420.1043-75 Rev. R0
14 mm
91490168421
MAC: 00-60-65-00-C6-A7
4PP420.1043-75 Rev. R0

MAC: 00-60-65-00:C6:A7

search field.

e.g. 4PP451.0571-65

4.3 Device 4PP420.0571-45
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)

Features 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. F0 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. G0 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. J0

B&R ID code 0x23B9
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB (64 MB < Rev. C0)
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
Remanent variables for AR 256 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. F0 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. G0 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. J0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots 1 (see B&R System 2005 manual for available aPCI interface modules)
Holding torque for aPCI module Max. 0.7 Nm
Display
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. F0 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. G0 4PP420.0571-45 Rev. J0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Weight Approx. 1.7 kg (without aPCI interface modules)
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock
Protection IP20 back side (only with installed CompactFlash card, inserted aPCI module
or with an optional aPCI cover)


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.3.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP420 5.7in QVGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen

4.4 Device 4PP420.0571-65
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)

Features 4PP420.0571-65 E0 4PP420.0571-65 F0

B&R ID code 0x23BA
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP420.0571-65 E0 4PP420.0571-65 F0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Type Color LCD
Colors 512 colors4)
Contrast 40:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 200 cd/m
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0571-65 E0 4PP420.0571-65 F0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.4.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP420, 5.7" QVGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen

4.5 Device 4PP420.0571-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)


B&R ID code 0xA159
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Technical data
Chapter 2
Display
50
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0571-75 Rev. C0 4PP420.0571-75 Rev. D0 4PP420.0571-75 Rev. F0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray5)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.5.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

4.6 Device 4PP420.0571-85
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)


B&R ID code 0xA52E
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0571-85 Rev. E0 4PP420.0571-85 Rev. F0 4PP420.0571-85 Rev. I0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 98 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Weight Approx. 2 kg (without aPCI interface modules)
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.6.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 89 6

156
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
212
8

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

4.7 Device 4PP420.0571-A5
Technical data
Chapter 2
Figure 126: Front view - 4PP420.0571-A5
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)
Figure 127: Rear view - 4PP420.0571-A5

Features 4PP420.0571-A5 D0 4PP420.0571-A5 E0

B&R ID code 0x23BC
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Table 78: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-A5

Features 4PP420.0571-A5 D0 4PP420.0571-A5 E0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Type Color LCD
Colors 512 colors4)
Contrast 40:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 200 cd/m
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness
Table 78: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-A5 (Forts.)

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0571-A5 D0 4PP420.0571-A5 E0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 98 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock
Table 78: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-A5 (Forts.)


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 128: Temperature humidity diagram - 4PP420.0571-A5
4.7.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 89 6

156
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
212
8
Figure 129: Dimensions - 4PP420.0571-A5

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Figure 130: Cutout installation - 4PP420.0571-A5
Amount Component
Table 79: Contents of delivery - 4PP420.0571-A5

4.8 Device 4PP420.0571-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
Figure 131: Front view - 4PP420.0571-B5
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)
Figure 132: Rear view - 4PP420.0571-B5

Features 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. C0 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. D0 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. F0

B&R ID code 0xA15A
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Table 80: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-B5

Features 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. C0 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. D0 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. F0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
50
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness
Table 80: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-B5 (Forts.)

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. C0 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. D0 4PP420.0571-B5 Rev. F0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 98 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 133: Temperature humidity diagram - 4PP420.0571-B5
4.8.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 89 6

156
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
212
8
Figure 134: Dimensions - 4PP420.0571-B5

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Figure 135: Cutout installation - 4PP420.0571-B5
Amount Component
Table 81: Contents of delivery - 4PP420.0571-B5

4.9 Device 4PP420.0573-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
Supply
(with latch)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs SW1 SW2
(x16) (x1)

Features 4PP420.0573-75 E0 4PP420.0573-75 F0

B&R ID code 0x23BB
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP420.0573-75 E0 4PP420.0573-75 F0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Type Color TFT
Contrast 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 350 cd/m
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.0573-75 E0 4PP420.0573-75 F0

Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.9.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.4
8 196 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
156
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
8
212

156
149.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.0571-01
4PP320.0571-35
4PP420.0571-45
4PP420.0571-65
4PP420.0571-75
4PP420.0571-85
4PP420.0571-A5
4PP420.0571-B5
4PP420.0573-75
5PP320.0571-29
5PP320.0571-39
5PP320.0573-39
5PP320.0573-3B
6.5
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP420 5.7" VGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen

4.10 Device 4PP420.1043-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 1
Battery compartment
Grounding clip

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
LEDs
COM


B&R ID code 0x23BD
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB (64 MB < Rev. D0)
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.1043-75 F0 4PP420.1043-75 G0 4PP420.1043-75 J0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.10.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 300 3 75 8

81.5

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
260
240
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
100
10
323 27 27.5

260
251.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.1043-31
4PP420.1043-75
4PP420.1043-B5
4PP480.1043-75
5PP320.1043-39
8.5
0
323
0
313
10
Amount Component

4.11 Device 4PP420.1043-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1 Battery compartment
Grounding clip

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
LEDs
COM

Features 4PP420.1043-B5 F0 4PP420.1043-B5 G0 4PP420.1043-B5 J0

B&R ID code 0x23BE
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB (64 MB < Rev. D0)
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.1043-B5 F0 4PP420.1043-B5 G0 4PP420.1043-B5 J0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Depth 108 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.11.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 300 3 97 8

81.5

0.1 mm
260
240
up to 6 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
100
10
323 27 27.5

260
251.5
Cutout

for
4PP320.1043-31
4PP420.1043-75
4PP420.1043-B5
4PP480.1043-75
5PP320.1043-39
8.5
0
323
0
313
10
Amount Component

4.12 Device 4PP420.1505-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 1
Battery compartment

(with latch)
Power button
Reset button
SW2
Supply (x1)
voltage SW1
USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM

Features 4PP420.1505-75 G0 4PP420.1505-75 H0 4PP420.1505-75 J0

B&R ID code 0x23BF
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP420.1505-75 G0 4PP420.1505-75 H0 4PP420.1505-75 J0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.1505-75 G0 4PP420.1505-75 H0 4PP420.1505-75 J0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.12.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 76 8
81.5

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
309
330
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 27 28.5

330
321
Cutout

for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP420 15" XGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen

4.13 Device 4PP420.1505-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Battery compartment

(with latch)
Power button
Reset button
SW2
Supply (x1)
voltage SW1
USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM

Features 4PP420.1505-B5 F0 4PP420.1505-B5 G0 4PP420.1505-B5 I0

B&R ID code 0x23C0
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB (64 MB < C0)
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness

Electrical characteristics 4PP420.1505-B5 F0 4PP420.1505-B5 G0 4PP420.1505-B5 I0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Depth 109 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Technical data
Transport
50
Storage
Chapter 2
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
4.13.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 98 8
81.5

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
309
330
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 27 28.5

330
321
Cutout

for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP420 15" XGA, 2 aPCI, touch screen

4.14 Device 4PP451.0571-45
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Battery
compartment
Power button
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs

Features 4PP451.0571-45 < Rev. H0 4PP451.0571-45 Rev. H0

B&R ID code 0xA530
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Degree of transmission 95%
Coating On both sides
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP451.0571-45 < Rev. H0 4PP451.0571-45 Rev. H0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


6) The functions of the keys and the LEDs can be configured using Visual Components in B&R Automation Studio.
100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.14.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
8 196 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Technical data
Cutout
Chapter 2
for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP451 5.7" QVGA, 1 aPCI, keys

4.15 Device 4PP451.0571-65

aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Battery
compartment
Power button
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs

B&R ID code 0x23C1
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB (64 MB < C0)
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Type Color LCD
Colors 512 colors4)
Contrast 40:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 200 cd/m
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -


Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 212 mm
Chapter 2
Height 245 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


5) At +25C ambient temperature. Reducing the brightness by 50% can result in an approximate 50% increase of the half-brightness
time.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.15.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
8 196 3 67 6
Technical data
Chapter 2
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Cutout

for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

4.16 Device 4PP451.0571-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Battery
compartment
Power button
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs

Features 4PP451.0571-75 < Rev. D0 4PP451.0571-75 Rev. D0

B&R ID code 0xA15B
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP451.0571-75 < Rev. D0 4PP451.0571-75 Rev. D0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.16.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
8 196 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Technical data
Cutout
Chapter 2
for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

4.17 Device 4PP451.0571-85

aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Battery
compartment
Power button
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs


B&R ID code 0xA540
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -


Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 212 mm
Chapter 2
Height 245 mm
Depth 98 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.17.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
8 196 3 89 6
Technical data
Chapter 2
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Cutout

for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component

4.18 Device 4PP451.0571-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Battery
compartment
Power button
(with latch)
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet SW2
COM (x1)
SW1
Status (x16)
LEDs

Features 4PP451.0571-B5 < Rev. D0 4PP451.0571-B5 Rev. D0

B&R ID code 0xA531
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP451.0571-B5 < Rev. D0 4PP451.0571-B5 Rev. D0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 98 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.18.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
8 196 3 89 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
140
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
82
245
97
13.2
212 28

245
238.5
Technical data
Cutout
Chapter 2
for
4PP351.0571-01
4PP351.0571-35
4PP451.0571-45
4PP451.0571-65
4PP451.0571-75
4PP451.0571-85
4PP451.0571-B5
11.7
0
212
6.5
205.5
0
Amount Component
Table 101: Delivery contents - 4PP451.0571-B5

4.19 Device 4PP451.1043-75

Battery
compartment
aPCI Slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding clip
Power button
SW2
Reset button (x1)
Supply SW1
voltage USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM

Features 4PP451.1043-75 < G0 4PP451.1043-75 G0

B&R ID code 0xA52F
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP451.1043-75 < G0 4PP451.1043-75 G0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP451.1043-75 < G0 4PP451.1043-75 G0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 323 mm
Chapter 2
Height 358 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.19.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 300 3 75 8
Technical data
Chapter 2
81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
333
358
193
15
323 27,5

358
349.5
Cutout

for
4PP381.1043-31
4PP451.1043-75
4PP451.1043-B5
4PP481.1043-75
4PP481.1043-B5
13.5
0
0
10
313
323
Amount Component

4.20 Device 4PP451.1043-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery
compartment
aPCI slot 2
aPCI slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
SW2
Supply (x1)
voltage SW1
USB
(x16)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs

Features 4PP451.1043-B5 < G0 4PP451.1043-B5 G0

B&R ID code 0xA53F
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP451.1043-B5 < G0 4PP451.1043-B5 G0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP451.1043-B5 < G0 4PP451.1043-B5 G0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 358 mm
Depth 108 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


time.
100
Technical data
95
Chapter 2
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.20.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 300 3 75 8

81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
333
358
193
15
323 27.5

358
349.5
Technical data
Cutout
Chapter 2
for
4PP381.1043-31
4PP451.1043-75
4PP451.1043-B5
4PP481.1043-75
4PP481.1043-B5
13.5
0
0
10
313
323
Amount Component

4.21 Device 4PP452.0571-45
Battery compartment
aPCI slot 1
Grounding
clip Power button
CompactFlash slot
Reset button (with latch)
Supply
voltage USB
Ethernet
COM
Status SW2
LEDs SW1
(x1)
(x16)


B&R ID code 0xA534
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 25:1 25:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Soft keys -
Other keys -
6


Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 302 mm
Chapter 2
Height 187 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


time.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.21.3 Dimensions
2.9 196
11.9
286
Technical data
8 3 67 6
Chapter 2
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
187
171
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
31
8
302 47

187
180.5
Cutout

for
4PP352.0571-35
4PP452.0571-45
4PP452.0571-65
4PP452.0571-75
4PP452.0571-B5
6.5
0
302
6.5
295.5
0
Amount Component

4.22 Device 4PP452.0571-65
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI slot 1
Grounding
clip Power button
CompactFlash slot
Supply
voltage USB
Ethernet
COM
Status SW2
LEDs SW1
(x1)
(x16)

B&R ID code 0x23C2
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Type Color LCD
Colors 512 colors4)
Contrast 40:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL
Brightness 200 cd/m
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Soft keys -
Other keys -
6


Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 302 mm
Height 187 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.22.3 Dimensions
2.9 196
11.9
8 286 3 67 6

up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
187
171
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
31
8
302 47

187
180.5
Cutout
Technical data
Chapter 2
for
4PP352.0571-35
4PP452.0571-45
4PP452.0571-65
4PP452.0571-75
4PP452.0571-B5
6.5
0
302
6.5
295.5
0
Amount Component

4.23 Device 4PP452.0571-75
Battery compartment
aPCI slot 1
Grounding
clip Power button
CompactFlash slot
Supply
voltage USB
Ethernet
COM
Status SW2
LEDs SW1
(x1)
(x16)


B&R ID code 0xA15C
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Soft keys -
Other keys -
6

Electrical characteristics 4PP452.0571-75 < Rev. D0 4PP452.0571-75 Rev. D0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 302 mm
Chapter 2
Height 187 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.23.3 Dimensions
2.9 196
11.9
286
Technical data
8 3 67 6
Chapter 2
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
187
171
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
82
31
8
302 47

187
180.5
Cutout

for
4PP352.0571-35
4PP452.0571-45
4PP452.0571-65
4PP452.0571-75
4PP452.0571-B5
6.5
0
302
6.5
295.5
0
Amount Component

4.24 Device 4PP452.0571-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery
compartment
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Grounding clip
Power button
CompactFlash slot
Supply
voltage USB
Ethernet
COM
Status SW2
LEDs SW1
(x1)
(x16)


B&R ID code 0xA532
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass
Keys/LED6)
Soft keys -
Other keys -
6

Electrical characteristics 4PP452.0571-B5 < Rev. D0 4PP452.0571-B5 Rev. D0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 302 mm
Height 187 mm
Depth 98 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.24.3 Dimensions
2.9 196 11.9

8 286 3 89 6
Nominal
measurement General tolerance from
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
171
187
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm

over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
82
31
8
302 47

187
180.5
Cutout
Technical data
Chapter 2
for
4PP352.0571-35
4PP452.0571-45
4PP452.0571-65
4PP452.0571-75
4PP452.0571-B5
6.5
0
302
6.5
295.5
0
Amount Component

4.25 Device 4PP452.1043-75
Battery compartment
aPCI slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding
clip
Power button SW2
(x1)
Reset button SW1
Supply (x16)
voltage
USB Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM

Features 4PP452.1043-75 < G0 4PP452.1043-75 G0

B&R ID code 0xA533
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot

Features 4PP452.1043-75 < G0 4PP452.1043-75 G0

Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Diagonal 10.4 inch (264 mm) 10.4 inch (264 mm)
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Soft keys -
Other keys -
Key lifespan > 1,000,000 actuations with 1 0.3 to 3 0.3 N operating force

Electrical characteristics 4PP452.1043-75 < G0 4PP452.1043-75 G0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 423 mm
Chapter 2
Height 288 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.25.3 Dimensions
2.9 196 9.9

11.5 399 3 75 8
Technical data
Chapter 2
Nominal
measurement General tolerance
81.5
263.5
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
288

over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
123.5
14.5
423 27.5

288
279.5
Cutout

for
4PP452.1043-75
4PP482.1043-75
13
0
412
0
10
423
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP482 10.4" VGA, 1 aPCI, keys

4.26 Device 4PP480.1043-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 1
Battery compartment
Grounding clip

(with latch)
Reset button
Supply SW2
voltage (x1)
USB SW1
(x16)
Ethernet Status
LEDs
COM

Features 4PP480.1043-75 G0 4PP480.1043-75 H0 4PP480.1043-75 K0

B&R ID code 0x23C3
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Cursor keys -
Number block -
Other keys -
Key lifespan 6
> 10 actuations with 1 0.3 to 3 0.3 N operating force

Electrical characteristics 4PP480.1043-75 G0 4PP480.1043-75 H0 4PP480.1043-75 K0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 260 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
Technical data
70
Chapter 2
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.26.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 300 3 75 8
81.6
240
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
260
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
100
10
323 27.5

260
251.5
Cutout
Technical data
Chapter 2
for
4PP320.1043-31
4PP420.1043-75
4PP420.1043-B5
4PP480.1043-75
5PP320.1043-39
8.5
0
323
0
313
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP480 10.4" VGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen, keys

4.27 Device 4PP480.1505-75

aPCI Slot 1
Battery compartment

(with latch)
Power button
Reset button
SW2
Supply (x1)
voltage SW1
USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM

Features 4PP480.1505-75 H0 4PP480.1505-75 I0 4PP480.1505-75 K0

B&R ID code 0x23C4
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Diagonal 15 inch (380 mm) 15 inch (380 mm)
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Cursor keys -
Number block -
Other keys -
Key lifespan 6

Electrical characteristics 4PP480.1505-75 H0 4PP480.1505-75 I0 4PP480.1505-75 K0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 435 mm
Chapter 2
Height 330 mm
Depth 87 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.27.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 76 8
Technical data
Chapter 2
81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
330
309
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 28.5

330
321
Cutout

for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component
1 Power Panel PP480 15" XGA, 1 aPCI, touch screen, keys

4.28 Device 4PP480.1505-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
aPCI Slot 2
aPCI Slot 1
Battery compartment

(with latch)
Power button
Reset button
SW2
Supply (x1)
voltage SW1
USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM


B&R ID code 0xA52D
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Cursor keys -
Number block -
Other keys -
Key lifespan 6

Electrical characteristics 4PP480.1505-B5 F0 4PP480.1505-B5 G0 4PP480.1505-B5 I0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 435 mm
Height 330 mm
Depth 109 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
Technical data
70
Chapter 2
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.28.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 412 3 98 8
Nominal
81.6
measurement General tolerance from
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
309
330
over 120 to 400 0.5 mm
over 400 to 1000 0.8 mm
169
10.5
435 28.5

330
321
Cutout
Technical data
Chapter 2
for
4PP320.1505-31
4PP420.1505-75
4PP420.1505-B5
4PP480.1505-75
4PP480.1505-B5
5PP320.1505-39
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component

4.29 Device 4PP481.1043-75

Battery
compartment
aPCI Slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding clip
Power button
SW2
Reset button (x1)
Supply SW1
voltage USB (x16)
Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM


B&R ID code 0x23C5
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -


Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 323 mm
Chapter 2
Height 358 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.29.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 300 3 75 8
Technical data
Chapter 2
81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
333
358
193
15
323 27.5

358
349.5
Cutout

for
4PP381.1043-31
4PP451.1043-75
4PP451.1043-B5
4PP481.1043-75
4PP481.1043-B5
13.5
0
0
10
313
323
Amount Component

4.30 Device 4PP481.1043-B5
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery
compartment
aPCI slot 2
aPCI slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding clip
Power button
Reset button
SW2
Supply (x1)
voltage SW1
USB
(x16)
Ethernet
COM
Status
LEDs


B&R ID code 0x23C6
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Other keys -

Electrical characteristics 4PP481.1043-B5 F0 4PP481.1043-B5 G0 4PP481.1043-B5 J0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 358 mm
Depth 108 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.30.3 Dimensions
9.9
2.9
11.5 300 3 97 8
81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
333
358
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
193
15
323 27.5

358
349.5
Technical data
Cutout
Chapter 2
for
4PP381.1043-31
4PP451.1043-75
4PP451.1043-B5
4PP481.1043-75
4PP481.1043-B5
13.5
0
0
10
313
323
Amount Component

4.31 Device 4PP481.1505-75

Battery compartment
aPCI slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
SW2
(x1)
Grounding
SW1
clip
(x16)
Power button
Status
Reset button LEDs
Supply
voltage
USB
Ethernet
COM


B&R ID code 0x23C7
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Chapter 2
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB (64 MB Rev. < C0)
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 400:1 1000:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Other keys 73 without LED

Electrical characteristics 4PP481.1505-75 H0 4PP481.1505-75 I0 4PP481.1505-75 K0

Power supply
Outer dimensions
Technical data
Width 435 mm
Chapter 2
Height 430 mm
Depth 87 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.31.3 Dimensions
2.9 9.9
11.5 412 3 76 8
Technical data
Chapter 2
81.6
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
430
409.5
over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
269.5
10
435 28.5

430
421
Cutout

for
4PP481.1505-75
9
0
425
435
0
10
Amount Component

4.32 Device 4PP482.1043-75
Technical data
Chapter 2
Battery compartment
aPCI slot 1
CompactFlash slot
(with latch)
Grounding
clip
Power button SW2
(x1)
Reset button SW1
Supply (x16)
voltage
USB Status
Ethernet LEDs
COM


B&R ID code 0x23C8
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Background lighting
Type CCFL LED
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED6)
Soft keys -
Other keys -
Key lifespan > 1,000,000 actuations with 1 0.3 to 3 0.3 N operating force


Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 423 mm
Height 288 mm
Depth 86 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock


100
95
90
Technical data
85
Chapter 2
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +

4.32.3 Dimensions
2.9 196 9.9

11.5 399 3 75 8

81.5
up to 6 mm 0.1 mm
263.5
288

over 400 to 1000 mm 0.8 mm
123.5
14.5
423 27.5

288
279.5
Cutout
Technical data
Chapter 2
for
4PP452.1043-75
4PP482.1043-75
13
0
412
0
10
423
Amount Component

Technical data Power Panel light / compact
5. Power Panel light / compact
Power Panel 400 light / compact series devices have QVGA operator panels with an integrated
controller.
Power Panel 400 light devices are primarily intended for applications which rely on CAN bus or
X2X interfaces for connecting peripherals without requiring Ethernet.
Devices from the compact series are also equipped with a 10/100 Ethernet interface, making
them the ideal choice anywhere a network connection to a higher-level computer is required.
Power Panel devices are delivered as B&R sets, i.e. already with an inserted aPCI module. The
following QVGA Power Panel light / compact versions are available:
5.1.1 Technical data - Power Panel 420 light
Features 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571

-L05 -L45 -L25 -L65 -L35 -L75
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Table 130: Technical data - Power Panel 420 light


-L05 -L45 -L25 -L65 -L35 -L75
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Technical data
Ethernet -
Chapter 2
Controller
Transfer rate
Connection
Cables
NE2000-compatible
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs.
CAN aPCI X2X aPCI CAN aPCI X2X aPCI CAN aPCI X2X aPCI
module module module module module module
(3IF771.9) (3IF791.9) (3IF771.9) (3IF791.9) (3IF771.9) (3IF791.9)
inserted inserted inserted inserted inserted inserted


-L05 -L45 -L25 -L65 -L35 -L75
Display
Type Monochrome LCD Color LCD Color TFT
Diagonal 5.7 in (144 mm) 5.7 in (144 mm) 5.7 in (144 mm)
Colors 8 shades of gray4) 512 colors4) 262144 colors4)
Resolution QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels
Contrast 25:1 40:1 400:1
Horizontal Direction R / direction L = 40 Direction R / direction L = 40 Direction R / direction L = 60
Vertical Direction U = 40/ direction D Direction U = 40/ direction D Direction U = 40/ direction D
= 50 = 50 = 50
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL CCFL
Brightness 220 cd/m 200 cd/m 500 cd/m
Half-brightness time5) 50000 hours 50000 hours 50000 hours
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 Yes, see chapter 3 Yes, see chapter 3
"Commissioning", section "Commissioning", section "Commissioning", section
"Screen rotation", on page 410 "Screen rotation", on page 410 "Screen rotation", on page 410
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 76 mm

Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Mechanical characteristics 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571
-L05 -L45 -L25 -L65 -L35 -L75
Housing Metal
Technical data
Chapter 2
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C 0 to +50C
Bearings -20 to +70C -20 to +60C
Transport -20 to +70C -20 to +60C
Relative humidity See 5.1.2 "Temperature See 5.1.3 "Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light color LCD
humidity diagram - PP420 light, and color TFT", on page 380
monochrome LCD", on
page 380
Vibration
Shock

time.

5.1.2 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light, monochrome LCD
The following diagram is valid for the devices 4PP420:0571-L05 and 4PP420:0571-L45.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50 Transport
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 256: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light, monochrome LCD
5.1.3 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light color LCD and color TFT
The following diagram is valid for the devices 4PP420:0571-L25, 4PP420:0571-L65,

4PP420:0571-L35 and 4PP420:0571-L75.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 257: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light color LCD and color TFT

5.1.4 Technical data - Power Panel 420 compact

-C05 -C45 -C25 -C65 -C35 -C75
Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Technical data
Cooling
Chapter 2
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot
Table 131: Technical data - Power Panel 420 compact


-C05 -C45 -C25 -C65 -C35 -C75
Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs.
CAN aPCI X2X aPCI CAN aPCI X2X aPCI CAN aPCI X2X aPCI
module module module module module module
(3IF771.9) (3IF791.9) (3IF771.9) (3IF791.9) (3IF771.9) (3IF791.9)
inserted inserted inserted inserted inserted inserted
Display
Type Monochrome LCD Color LCD Color TFT
Diagonal 5.7 in (144 mm) 5.7 in (144 mm) 5.7 in (144 mm)
Colors 8 shades of gray4) 512 colors4) 262144 colors4)
Resolution QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels QVGA, 320 x 240 pixels
Contrast 25:1 40:1 400:1
Horizontal Direction R / direction L = 40 Direction R / direction L = 40 Direction R / direction L = 60
Vertical Direction U = 40/ direction D Direction U = 40/ direction D Direction U = 40/ direction D
= 50 = 50 = 50
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL CCFL
Brightness 220 cd/m 200 cd/m 500 cd/m
Half-brightness time5) 50000 hours 50000 hours 50000 hours
Screen rotation Yes, see chapter 3 Yes, see chapter 3 Yes, see chapter 3
"Commissioning", section "Commissioning", section "Commissioning", section
"Screen rotation", on page 410 "Screen rotation", on page 410 "Screen rotation", on page 410
Touch screen
Filter glass -
Coating


-C05 -C45 -C25 -C65 -C35 -C75
Keys/LED -
Function keys
Soft keys
Cursor keys
Number block
Other keys
Key lifespan
LED brightness
Technical data
Power supply
Chapter 2
Rated current 0.5 A
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 156 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray6)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C 0 to +50C
Bearings -20 to +70C -20 to +60C
Transport -20 to +70C -20 to +60C
Relative humidity See 5.1.5 "Temperature 5.1.6 "Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact color LCD
humidity diagram - PP420 and color TFT", on page 385
compact, monochrome LCD",
on page 384
Vibration
Shock

Environmental characteristics 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571 4PP420:0571

-C05 -C45 -C25 -C65 -C35 -C75

time.
5.1.5 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact, monochrome LCD
The following diagram is valid for the devices 4PP420:0571-C05 and 4PP420:0571-C45.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 258: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact, monochrome LCD

5.1.6 Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact color LCD and color TFT
The following diagram is valid for the devices 4PP420:0571-C25, 4PP420:0571-C65,

4PP420:0571-C35 and 4PP420:0571-C75.
100
95
90
85
80
75
Technical data
70
Chapter 2
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 259: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact color LCD and color TFT

Features 4PP451:0571-L25 4PP451:0571-L65 4PP451:0571-L35 4PP451:0571-L75

Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet -
Controller
Transfer rate
Connection
Cables
NE2000-compatible
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
aPCI slots 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs.
CAN aPCI module X2X aPCI module CAN aPCI module X2X aPCI module
(3IF771.9) inserted (3IF791.9) inserted (3IF771.9) inserted (3IF791.9) inserted
Display
Type Color LCD Color TFT
Contrast 40:1 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass


Keys/LED6)
Other keys -
Pressing more than one key at a time may result in so-called phantom keys, and may trigger
unintended actions.
Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock

Environmental characteristics 4PP451:0571-L25 4PP451:0571-L65 4PP451:0571-L35 4PP451:0571-L75


Technical data
Chapter 2
time.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 260: Temperature humidity diagram - PP451 light

Features 4PP451:0571-C25 4PP451:0571-C65 4PP451:0571-C35 4PP451:0571-C75

Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 40:1 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass


Keys/LED6)
Other keys -
unintended actions.
Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 212 mm
Height 245 mm
Depth 76 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock

Environmental characteristics 4PP451:0571-C25 4PP451:0571-C65 4PP451:0571-C35 4PP451:0571-C75


Technical data
Chapter 2
time.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 261: Temperature humidity diagram - PP451 compact


Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM DDR SDRAM
Size 64 MB 128 MB 64 MB 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 256 kB 512 kB 256 kB 512 kB
Battery-buffered Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remanent variables for AR 256 kB 256 kB 256 kB 256 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet -
Controller
Transfer rate
Connection
Cables
NE2000-compatible
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 40:1 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass


Keys/LED6)
Other keys -
unintended actions.
Electrical properties
Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 358 mm
Depth 108 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock

Environmental characteristics 4PP452:0571-L25 4PP452:0571-L65 4PP452:0571-L35 4PP452:0571-L75


Technical data
Chapter 2
time.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 262: Temperature humidity diagram - PP452 light


Processor
L2 cache 128 kB
Cooling
Memory
Type DDR SDRAM
Size 128 MB
Graphics
SRAM
Size 512 kB
mode
Watchdog
Controller MTCX1)
Power failure logic
Controller MTCX1)
Buffer time 10 ms
Battery
Type Renata 950 mAh
Ethernet
NE2000-compatible -
CompactFlash
Type Type I
Amount 1 slot


Serial interface
USB interface
Amount 2
Connection Type A
Technical data
Chapter 2
LEDs 1x CF (yellow)
Display
Contrast 40:1 400:1
Background lighting
Type CCFL CCFL
Touch screen -
Touch screen type
Technology
Controller
Filter glass


Keys/LED6)
Other keys -
unintended actions.
Power supply
Outer dimensions
Width 323 mm
Height 358 mm
Depth 108 mm
Front
Design Gray7)
Membrane Polyester
Housing Metal
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Vibration
Shock

Environmental characteristics 4PP452:0571-C25 4PP452:0571-C65 4PP452:0571-C35 4PP452:0571-C75


Technical data
Chapter 2
time.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
50
Storage
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 263: Temperature humidity diagram - PP452 compact

Technical data Block diagram
6. Block diagram
The following block diagrams show the simplified system unit structure with a CPU board.
6.1 Power Panel 300 (with no aPCI slots)

Power Supply PCB
Power SPI prog. Fan Serial Key Touch Touch

RS232 5-wire 4-wire
3-pin connector - + 3-pin 6-pin
5V 5V Line
driver Elo Touch
CMOS contrl.
DC/DC DC/DC DC/DC <>
switching switching isolated > 2.7V Rs232
> 11V
CTS, DTR, DSR,

RXD, TXD, RTS,
EEProm
Ext. Touch
DCD, RI
93C46
Vbat 6-pin
5V
RXD, TXD,
RTS, CTS
5V 3V3 15.6V
LED
green / red
Altera Power button

EP2C8
DC/DC DC/DC
switching switching
SPI Cyclon II
I2C MTCX Reset button
BGA256
1.25V 2.6V Node number
NVRAM SPI Flash EEProm Temp. switch
512 KB 8 MBit 16 kBit monitor
External
inverter Node number
15.6V
switch
SRAM
Vbat 32 KB
Backlight CCFL Boot switch

14.318MHz EEProm
2-pin inverter 15.6V 93C46
Clock
generator
LCD B/W LCD bias
MK1491-09
Temp.
diode
FFC 14-pin contrast

Clock GeodeLink
module PCI
Intel
LCD COL
FFC 16-pin GeodeLink GD82551ER
control
Magnetics RJ45
Video AMD Ethernet Controller
PCI bus
processor BGA196
Geode
TFT dig. ALXC800
FFC 30-pin
JTAG
BGA481 25 MHz
TFT dig.
FFC 33-pin
input port
controller
memory
Geode
Video
TFT LVDS LVDS

FFC 20-pin transmitter
4 x DDR
8M x 16
Vbat 32kHz
...64Mx16
64 MB ... 512 MB USB3

GeodeLink
DDR SDRAM
Interface
SMB
Echtzeituhr
RTC USB1
Times
GPIO
USB USB4
BIOS AMD OHCI / EHCI OTG
Flash LPC
2 MB
CS5536
Companion Device IDE Compact
UART2 BGA208 controller Flash
LED
Speaker
yellow
RxD, TxD
AC97
JTAG
UART1
Internal connections
RS232 int. AC97

External connections JTAG
4-pin Header
Figure 264: Block diagram - Power Panel 300

6.2 Power Panel 400 with 1 aPCI slot

Power Supply PCB
Power SPI prog. Fan Serial key Touch Touch

RS232 5-wire 4-wire
5V 5V Line
driver Elo Touch
CMOS contrl.
switching switching isolated > 2.7V Rs232
> 11V
CTS, DTR, DSR,

RXD, TXD, RTS,
EEProm
Ext. Touch
DCD, RI
93C46
Vbat 6-pin
Technical data
5V
Chapter 2
RXD, TXD,
RTS, CTS
5V 3V3 15,6V
LED
green / red
Altera Power button

EP2C8
DC/DC DC/DC
switching switching
SPI Cyclon II
BGA256
1.25V 2.6V Node number
External
15.6V
switch
SRAM
Vbat 32 KB

14.318 MHz EEProm
2-pin inverter 15.6V 93C46
Clock aPCI
generator Backplane
LCD B/W LCD bias
MK1491-09
Temp.
Diode
FFC 14-pin contrast

Clock GeodeLink
module PCI
Intel
LCD COL
Contorl
Magnetics RJ45
PCI bus
pricessor BGA196
Geode
TFT dig. ALXC800
FFC 30-pin
JTAG
BGA481 25MHz
TFT dig.
FFC 33-pin
Controller
input port
Memory
Geode
Video
TFT LVDS LVDS

4 x DDR
8M x 16
Vbat 32 kHz
...64Mx16
64 MB ... 512 MB USB3

GeodeLink
DDR SDRAM
interface
SMB
Real-time
clock RTC USB1
Times
GPIO
USB USB4
Flash LPC
2 MB
CS5536
Companion device IDE Compact
LED
Speaker
yellow
RxD, TxD
AC97
JTAG
UART1
Internal connections
RS232 int. AC97

External connections JTAG
4-pin header
Figure 265: Block diagram - Power Panel 400 with 1 aPCI slot

6.3 Power Panel 400 with 2 aPCI slots

Power Supply PCB
Power SPI prog. Fan Serial key Touch Touch

RS232 5-wire 4-wire
5V 5V Line
driver Elo touch
CMOS contrl.
switching switching isolated > 2.7 V Rs232
> 11 V
CTS, DTR, DSR,

RXD, TXD, RTS,
EEProm
Ext. touch
DCD, RI
93C46
Vbat 6-pin
5V
RXD, TXD,
RTS, CTS
5V 3V3 15.6 V
LED
green / red
Altera Power button

EP2C8
DC/DC DC/DC
switching switching
SPI Cyclon II
BGA256
1.25 V 2.6 V Node number
External
15.6 V
switch
SRAM
Vbat 32 KB

14.318 MHz EEProm
2-pin inverter 15.6 V 93C46
Clock 2 aPCI
generator backplanes
LCD B/W LCD bias
MK1491-09
Temp.
diode
FFC 14-pin contrast

Clock GeodeLink
module PCI
Intel
LCD COL
control
Magnetics RJ45
PCI bus
processor BGA196
Geode
TFT dig. ALXC800
FFC 30-pin
JTAG
BGA481 25 MHz
TFT dig.
FFC 33-pin
input port
controller
memory
Geode
Video
TFT LVDS LVDS

4 x DDR
8M x 16
Vbat 32 kHz
...64Mx16
64 MB ... 512 MB USB3

GeodeLink
DDR SDRAM
Interface
SMB
Real-time
clock RTC USB1
Times
GPIO
USB USB4
Flash LPC
2 MB
CS5536
Companion Device IDE Compact
LED
Speaker
yellow
RxD, TxD
AC97
JTAG
UART1
interne Anschlsse
RS232 int. AC97

externe Anschlsse JTAG
4-pin header
Figure 266: Block diagram - Power Panel 400 with 2 aPCI slots

Commissioning Mounting instructions
Chapter 3 Commissioning
1. Mounting instructions
The Power Panel must be mounted using the retaining clips included in delivery.
Depending on the Power Panel version, a corresponding number of retaining clips are
included.
Commissioning
Chapter 3
Figure 267: Retaining clip
In order to guarantee proper air circulation, allow a sufficient amount of space above,
below, to the side and behind the Power Panel device. The minimum specified free space
can be found in the diagram below. Free space specifications apply to all Power Panel
versions (with/without aPCI slots and keys).

Commissioning Mounting instructions
Side view
At least 80 mm
Air flow
At least 80 mm
At least 80 mm
Air flow
Rear view
At least 40 mm At least 40 mm
Table 136: Space for air circulation

Commissioning Mounting orientation
2. Mounting orientation
The following diagram displays the specified mounting orientation for the Power Panel device.
The mounting orientation applies to all Power Panel versions (with/without aPCI slots and keys).
Mounting orientation 0
Commissioning
Chapter 3
Table 137: Mounting orientation 0

Commissioning Mounting orientation
Mounting orientation -45 Mounting orientation +45
0 0
+45
-45
Connection side down Connection side down
Table 138: Mounting orientation -45 and +45.
Caution!
The maximum permitted ambient temperature can be found in the technical data for
the respective Power Panel device.

Commissioning Touch screen calibration
3. Touch screen calibration
B&R touch screen devices are equipped with a touch controller that supports hardware
calibration. This means that the devices are pre-calibrated from stock. This feature proves
advantageous in the case of a replacement part because a new calibration is no longer required
when exchanging devices (identical model / type). Nevertheless, we recommend calibrating the
device in order to achieve the best results and to better readjust the touch screen to the user's
preferences.
Regardless of this, the touch screen driver requires calibration following installation.
3.1 Windows CE
Windows CE starts the touch screen calibration sequence during its first boot in the default
configuration / delivered state.
3.2 Windows XP embedded
Commissioning
Chapter 3
After first starting Windows XP embedded (First Boot Agent), the touch screen driver must be
installed in the device in order to operate the touch screen. The corresponding drivers can be
downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com). The
touch screen should be calibrated during driver installation.
3.3 Automation Runtime / Visual Components
The first time the touch screen is used, it must be calibrated once in the customer application for
the existing device and project.

Commissioning Screen rotation
4. Screen rotation
It is possible to rotate the image content by 90 using the graphic driver's screen rotation function
(must support the function).
4.1 Windows XP embedded
The graphics driver does not support the screen rotation function.
4.2 Windows CE
The graphics driver supports the screen rotation function. The touch screen must be recalibrated
after rotation 1 (manual restart or when prompted by the operating system).
4.3 Automation Runtime / Visual Components
Automation Runtime supports the screen rotation function. When developing a project using
Automation Studio 2.7.x or 3.0.x, you can select the orientation of the display before getting
started.

Commissioning User tips for increasing the display lifespan
5. User tips for increasing the display lifespan
5.1 Backlight
The lifespan of the backlight is specified in "Half Brightness Time". An operating time of 50,000
hours would mean that the display brightness would still be 50% after this time.
5.2 How can the lifespan of backlights be extended?
Set the display brightness to the lowest value that is still comfortable for the eyes
Use dark images
Reducing the brightness by 50% can result in an approximate 50% increase of the half-
brightness time.
5.3 Image sticking
Commissioning
Chapter 3
Image sticking is the "burning in" of a static image on a display after being displayed for a
prolonged period of time. However, this does not only occur with static images. Image sticking
is known in technical literature as the "burn-in effect", "image retention", "memory effect",
"memory sticking" or "ghost image".
There are 2 types of this:
Area type: This is seen with a dark gray image. The effect disappears if the display is
switched off for a longer period of time.
Line type: This can cause lasting damage.
5.4 What causes image sticking?
Static images
Screensaver not enabled
Sharp contrast transitions (e.g. black / white)
High ambient temperatures
Operation outside of the specifications

Commissioning Pixel error
5.5 How can image sticking be avoided?
continual change between static and dynamic images

avoiding excessive brightness contrast between foreground and background display
use of colors with similar brightness
use of complementary colors in subsequent images
use of screensavers
6. Pixel error
Information:
Displays can contain dead pixels that result from the manufacturing process. These
flaws are not grounds claiming reclamation or warranty.

Software Power Panel 300 with BIOS
Chapter 4 Software
1. Power Panel 300 with BIOS
Information:
The following diagrams and BIOS menu items including descriptions refer to BIOS
version 1.14. It is therefore possible that these diagrams and BIOS descriptions do
not correspond with the installed BIOS version.
1.1 General information
BIOS stands for "Basic Input Output System". It is the most basic standardized communication
between the user and the system (hardware). A B&R-modified BIOS from Insyde is used in the
Power Panel devices.
BIOS setup lets you modify basic system configuration settings. These settings are saved in
CMOS RAM.
The CMOS RAM is a nonvolatile, battery-backed memory that retains information when power
Chapter 4
Software
is not applied to the Power Panel.
BIOS is immediately activated when switching on the power supply of the Power Panel.
BIOS reads the system configuration information in CMOS RAM, checks the system, and
configures it using the power-on self-test (POST).

1.2 Summary screen
Power Panel
Rev: V01.14 (1.02.15) Built: 07/18/2007 07:38:15

Geode LX Rev: C0 @ 500MHz PCI: 33MHz 5536 Rev: B1
Memory: 57024k @ 333MHz/DDR CAS: 2.5
Floppy A: 1.44M COM1: 03F8 GeodeROM: 4.52.36
COM2: 02F8 VSA: 03B0
USB: Legacy VideoBIOS: 060C
PM: Disabled
(c) 2002-2007 Copyright Bernecker + Rainer

(c) 1999-2005 Copyright Advanced Micro Devices
Figure 268: BIOS summary screen for VGA, SVGA and XGA Power Panel devices
To deactivate this summary screen for VGA, SVGA and XGA variants, see "Miscellaneous
configuration", on page 432.
Power Panel
Rev: V01.14 (1.02.15) Built:07/18/2007

Geode LX Rev: C0 @ 500MHz 5536 Rev: B1
Memory: 57024k @ 333MHz/DDR CAS: 2.5
FPD A:1.44M COM1: 03F8
COM2: 02F8
USB: Legacy
PM: Disabled GeodeROM: 4.52.36
VideoBIOS: 060C
USA: 03B0
(c) 1999-2007 B&R
(c) 1999-2005 AMD
Figure 269: BIOS summary screen for QVGA Power Panel devices
To deactivate this summary screen for QVGA variants, see "Miscellaneous configuration", on
page 453.

To make changes in BIOS setup: while the Power Panel device is booting, press the DEL key
as soon as the following message appears in the upper margin of the display (during POST):
Press DEL for Setup _
Figure 270: Press DEL for setup
If the message disappears before DEL has been pressed1) , the Power Panel must be rebooted
in order to enter BIOS setup.
Warning!
The following general rule applies: Only modify those settings that you completely
understand. On no account should settings be changed without a good reason. The
BIOS settings have been carefully chosen by B&R to guarantee ideal performance
and reliability. Even a seemingly minor change to the settings may cause the system
to become unstable.
Information:
The settings recommended by B&R can be loaded with "Load defaults". For a list of
the default values, see Section 1.5 "BIOS default values", on page 459.
Chapter 4
Software
The following keys1) help you navigate in BIOS setup:
Key Function
Cursor Moves to the previous item.
Cursor Go to the next item.
Cursor Moves to the previous item.
Cursor Go to the next item.
ESC Exits the submenu.
Enter or press highlighted character Changes to the selected menu.
shortcut
F1 and ALT+H Opens up a help window that describes the possible values for the highlighted item. Press ESC to exit
the help window. In a help window, the cursor , Cursor , Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down
keys can be used to navigate when help texts are longer than the displayable area.
Home Jumps to the first BIOS menu item or object.
End Jumps to the last BIOS menu item or object.
ALT+Q and ALT+X Enters the BIOS main menu.
Table 139: BIOS-relevant keys
1) A USB keyboard is required to enter characters and operate BIOS setup pages.

Key Function
- (Minus) Decreases the numerical value or selects the previous parameter value.
+ (Plus) Increases the numerical value or selects the next parameter value.
Table 139: BIOS-relevant keys (Forts.)

1.3 BIOS settings for VGA, SVGA and XGA Power Panel devices
Information:
The BIOS default values can be found in the section 1.5 "BIOS default values", on
page 459.
1.3.1 Main menu
Immediately after the DEL button is pressed during startup, the main BIOS setup menu appears.
XpressROM Setup
F1/ALT+H:Show Help ESC:Exit ALT+Q:Go to Main Menu ENTER:Select +/-:Choice
Main Menu
T. Time 12:30:25
D. Date 04/19/2007
B. Motherboard Device Configuration

M. Memory and Cache Optimization
C. System Clock/PLL Configuration
P. Power Management
I. Device Information
H. Miscellaneous Configuration
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults
S. Save Values Without Exit

Q. Exit Without Save
X. Save values and Exit
Chapter 4
Software
Set the current time in the RTC
Figure 271: Main menu
The individual menu items are explained in detail in the following sections.
Shortcut BIOS setup menu Function

T Time 21:56:12 The system time can be configured here.
D Date 04/19/2007 The system date can be configured here.
B Motherboard device Motherboard resources can be configured here.
configuration
M Memory and cache The settings for memory management can be made here.
optimization
C System clock/PLL The timing settings can be made here.
configuration
P Power management Setup of various APM (Advanced Power Management) options.
I Device information Important parameters (temp., mode/node position, etc.) for the Power Panel device.
Table 140: Overview of BIOS main menu functions


H Miscellaneous configuration The various BIOS settings can be configured here (Summary screen, Halt on errors, etc.)
O Boot order The boot order can be set here.
L Load defaults Load the optimal BIOS settings for best performance.
S Save values without exit Saves BIOS values without exiting BIOS setup.
Q Exit without save Exits BIOS setup without saving any changes.
X Save values and exit Saves settings and exits BIOS setup.
Table 140: Overview of BIOS main menu functions (Forts.)
1.3.2 Time
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 12:30:25
D. Date 04/19/2007

M. Memory an Cache Optimization
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

Main Menu/T. Time

Time: _
TIMEthe
Set as current
HH:MM[:SS] (Seconds
time are optional)
in the RTC
Figure 272: Time
The currently configured system time is displayed here. The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS
battery) after the Power Panel device has been switched off.
By selecting the item "Time" and the confirming by pressing Enter, or using the shortcut "A", you
can enter a new system time. The format HH:MM[:SS] must be entered as follows:
Example: Set time to 13:00:00.
The entry can be made in three different ways using the keyboard:
13:00:00 - Confirm with Enter

13:00 - Confirm with Enter

13: - Confirm with Enter
Information:
If using a German keyboard, press the "Shift+" key to enter ":".
1.3.3 Date
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 12:30:25
D. Date 04/19/2007

P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

Main Menu/D. Date

Date: _
Chapter 4
Software
Datethe
Set as current
MM/DD/YYYY
time in the RTC
Figure 273: Date
The current system date is displayed here. The date is buffered by a battery (CMOS battery)
after the Power Panel device has been switched off.
By selecting the item "Date" and the confirming by pressing Enter, or using the shortcut "B", you
can enter a new system date. The format MM:DD:YYYY must be entered as shown in the
following example:
Example: Set date to 2.12.2003.
Entry using keyboard:
02/12/2003 - Confirm with Enter
Information:
If using a German keyboard, press the "-" key (next to the Shift key) to enter "/".

1.3.4 Motherboard device configuration
XpressROM Setup
Motherboard Device Configuration
A. Drive Configuration
B. I/O Configuration
F. Video and Flat Panel Configuration
G. PCI Configuration
U. USB Configuration
T. Thermal Configuration
R. Return to Main Menu
Set configuration for Hard Drive, Floppy Drive, and Flash devices
Figure 274: Motherboard device configuration

A Drive configuration Settings for the floppy drive and CompactFlash card.
B I/O configuration Configuration of the I/O devices.
F Video and flat panel configuration Displays the video settings and configuration for resolution, brightness, and contrast
display parameters.
G PCI Configuration Configures PCI bus settings.
U USB configuration Configures the USB settings.
T Thermal configuration Display of temperatures.
R Return to main menu Exits the current page and returns to the BIOS main menu.
Table 141: BIOS motherboard device configuration menu

Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration
XpressROM Setup
Drive Configuration
IDE Configuration
IDE BIOS Support: Enabled
DMA/UDMA BIOS Support: Enabled
Force mode for CF Card: Auto
Boot Support Configuration

Floppy BIOS Support: Enabled
CD-ROM Boot BIOS Support: Enabled
USB BIOS Support: Enabled
Override of drives PIO/MDMA/UDMA capabilities
Figure 275: Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration
BIOS setting Meaning Setting options Effect

IDE BIOS support Displays the IDE configuration of the None -
inserted CompactFlash card.
Chapter 4
DMA/UDMA BIOS Display of the DMA/UDMA BIOS support None -
Software
support for the inserted CompactFlash card.
Force mode for CF The maximum data transfer mode to and Auto Configures the fastest mode supported by the
card from a CompactFlash card can be inserted CompactFlash card.
configured here.
PIO 0 to PIO 4 Manual configuration option for PIO mode.
Information: MDMA 0 to MDMA 2 Manual configuration option for MDMA mode.
If a mode is configured that is not UDMA 0 to UDMA 5 Manual configuration option for UDMA mode.
supported by the CompactFlash card,
then the fastest supported mode is
configured.
Floppy BIOS support Floppy support (USB) can be Enabled Floppy support activated.
activated/deactivated here.
Disabled Floppy support deactivated.
CD-ROM boot BIOS The CD-ROM boot BIOS support can be Enabled CD-ROM boot support activated.
support activated/deactivated here. Booting a connected USB
CD-ROM drive is possible.
Disabled CD-ROM boot support deactivated.
USB BIOS support USB BIOS support can be Enabled USB BIOS support activated.
Disabled USB BIOS support deactivated.
Table 142: BIOS drive configuration menu

Motherboard device configuration - I/O configuration
XpressROM Setup
Super I/O Configuration
Serial Port Configuration

COM A: Disabled
COM C: 0x3f8 IRQ 4
COM D: 0x2f8 IRQ 3
Configure the 1st on-board UART.
Figure 276: Motherboard device configuration - I/O configuration

COM A Configures the UART address range and Disabled No assignment. The interface is disabled.
the corresponding interrupt for the
optional internal interface. 0x3f8 IRQ 4 Use this address range and interrupt.
0x2f8 IRQ 3
Information:
0x3e8 IRQ 4
Two ports cannot use the same
address range and interrupt. 0x2e8 IRQ 3
COM C Configures the UART address range and Disabled No assignment. The serial interface is disabled.
external serial interface. 0x3f8 IRQ 4 Use this address range and interrupt.
0x2f8 IRQ 3
Information:
0x3e8 IRQ 4
0x3f8 IRQ 12
0x2f8 IRQ 11
0x3e8 IRQ 12
0x2e8 IRO 11
Table 143: BIOS super I/O configuration menu


COM D Configures the UART address range and Disabled No assignment. The touch screen is disabled and
the corresponding interrupt for the touch does not function.
controller.
0x3f8 IRQ 4 Use this address range and interrupt.
Information: 0x2f8 IRQ 3
Two ports cannot use the same 0x3e8 IRQ 4
address range and interrupt.
0x2e8 IRQ 3
0x3f8 IRQ 12
0x2f8 IRQ 11
0x3e8 IRQ 12
0x2e8 IRQ 11
Table 143: BIOS super I/O configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - video and flat panel
XpressROM Setup
Graphics Configuration
Graphics Memory: 008

Output Display: Flat Panel
Flat Panel Configuration

Type: TFT
Contrast: AUTO
Brightness: AUTO
Chapter 4
Software
Select graphics memory size. Use even numbers of MBytes only.
Figure 277: Motherboard device configuration - video and flat panel configuration

Graphics memory Setting for the amount of graphics 2-254 Value set manually.
memory reserved by the main memory.
Output display Selection of display mode Flat panel Displays on a Power Panel display.
Panel and CRT Displays on an external monitor and Power Panel
display.
Type Displays the Power Panel display type. None -
Table 144: BIOS video configuration menu


Contrast Setting for the contrast of the display. Auto The optimal contrast is automatically configured
using the factory settings. A contrast value
between 100% and 0% is set.
0% to 100% Manual setting of the desired contrast within
factory settings limits.
Brightness Setting for the background lighting of the Auto The optimal brightness is automatically
display. configured using the factory settings. A
brightness value between 100% and 0% is set.
0% to 100% Manual setting of the desired brightness within
factory settings limits.
Table 144: BIOS video configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - PCI configuration
XpressROM Setup
PCI Configuration
PCI Interrupt Steering

PCI INTA#: IRQ 10
PCI INTB#: IRQ 11
PCI INTC#: IRQ 10
PCI INTD#: IRQ 11
aPCI Slots
1st Module ID: NONE
Type:
Status: FPGA NFOUND
2nd Module ID: NONE

Type:
Status: FPGA NFOUND
Enable/Disable INTA# to IRQ steering
Figure 278: Motherboard device configuration - PCI configuration

PCI INTA# IRQ setting for the VGA controller. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14 or 15
PCI INTB# IRQ setting for the audio controller. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
14 or 15
PCI INTC# Activates IRQ for aPCI slot 2. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
First IRQ for aPCI slot 2 and second IRQ 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
for aPCI slot 1. 14 or 15
Table 145: BIOS PCI configuration menu


PCI INTD# IRQ setting for the USB port. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
14 or 15
aPCI slots Information about aPCI modules located None -
in the aPCI slots of the Power Panel
device.
Table 145: BIOS PCI configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - USB configuration
XpressROM Setup
PCI Configuration
USB 2.0 Settings

OHCI: Enabled
EHCI: Enabled
UDC: Disabled
OTG: Disabled
Overcurrent reporting: Disabled
Port 4 assignment: Host
Chapter 4
Software
Enable/Disable OHCI PCI header
Figure 279: Motherboard device configuration - USB configuration

OHCI Turns USB 1.0/1.1 support on/off (OHCI - Enabled Activates the USB port.
Open Host Controller Interface).
Disabled Deactivates the USB port.
EHCI Turns USB 2.0 support on/off (EHCI - Enabled Enables this function.
Enhanced Host Controller Interface).
Disabled Disables this function.
UDC Turns the USB device controller on/off. Enabled Enables this function.
When on, only the PCI config space is
activated in BIOS. Disabled Disables this function.
OTG Turns the On-to-Go device on/off. Only Enabled Enables this function.
the PCI config space is activated in BIOS.
Table 146: BIOS USB configuration menu


Overcurrent This function enables an automatic Enabled Enables this function.
reporting message
This function enables an automatic error Disabled Disables this function.
message to be sent to the system when
the USB hub is overloaded (e.g. in
Windows XP embedded).
Port 4 assignment With this option, USB port 4 can be Host Functions as host.
configured.
Device Functions as device (two computers can be
connected via port 4 - Master -> Slave).
Not used In BIOS, the default value (=Host) is assigned.
Table 146: BIOS USB configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - thermal configuration
XpressROM Setup
Thermal Configuration
Temperatures
CPU Intern: 56C
Board I/O: 42C
Fan: 0RPM
CMOS Battery: OK
Close Sub Menu
Figure 280: Motherboard device configuration - thermal configuration

CPU internal Displays the current internal processor None -
temperature.
Board I/O Indicates the current board I/O None -
temperature.
Fan Displays fan speed for the selected panel None -
(depending on features).
CMOS battery The status of the built-in CMOS battery is None -
displayed here.
Possible displays:
OK - Battery is ok, Bad - Battery
must be replaced.
Table 147: BIOS thermal configuration menu


Close submenu Close submenu Enter Closes the submenu.
Table 147: BIOS thermal configuration menu (Forts.)
1.3.5 Memory and cache optimization
Warning!
The parameters in this screen are for system designers, service personnel, and
technically competent users only. Only modify those settings that you completely
understand.
Incorrectly setting "Memory optimization" values can cause instability and even
cause the entire system not to boot. If the PPC300 can no longer be booted, then the
mode/node switch must be set to 0-0 and the default BIOS values can be restored
by pushing the reset button three times (see section 1.5.8 "Restoring the default
BIOS values", on page 461).
Information:
More detailed information about the meaning and effects of the settings can also be
found in the corresponding user's manual for the processor.
Chapter 4
Software
XpressROM Setup
Memory and Cache Optimization
Cache Mode: Write-Back

Cache Allocate: Disabled
Refresh Rate: Auto
Figure 281: Memory and cache optimization


Cache mode Using cache mode, write accesses are Write back The data is only written in the main memory if
determined on the cache. necessary (main memory and cache do not have
the same
information content).
Write through Data is written to the cache and to the main
memory.
Cache allocate The cache is divided into memory levels. Disabled Disables this function.
Enabled Enables this function.
Refresh rate The refresh cycle can be set here. Auto Value selected automatically.
Information: 15s, 3s, 7s, 31s, Value set manually.

62s or 125s
Enter the clock frequency, the chipset
does the rest.
Table 148: BIOS memory and cache optimization menu
1.3.6 System clock/PLL configuration
XpressROM Setup
System Clock/PLL Configuration
Clock Mode
Clock Determined By: H/W Strapping
Manual PLL Settings

CPU Multiplier: 500 MHz
RAM Multiplier: 333 MHz
Figure 282: System clock/PLL configuration

Clock determined by The processor clock can be set with this H/W strapping Value is set automatically.
option.
Manual settings Value must be set manually (CPU multiplier, RAM
multiplier).
Table 149: System clock/PLL configuration


CPU multiplier The CPU multiplier can be selected with None -
this option.
233 MHz, 266 MHz, Value set manually.
Information: 300 MHz, 333 MHz,
366 MHz, 400 MHz,
This value can only be set if the BIOS 433 MHz, 466 MHz,
setting "Clock determined by" is set to 500 MHz
Manual.
RAM multiplier The RAM multiplier can be selected with None -
this option.
366 MHz, 400 MHz,
Manual.
1.3.7 Power management
XpressROM Setup
Power Management
BIOS PM at Boot: Disabled
APM Available: Yes

ACPI Available: Yes
S1 Clocks: Off
CPU Clock Gating: Enabled
Chapter 4
Software
Chipset Clock Gating: Enabled
Power Button Configuration

Power Button: ACPI Mode
Power Loss Control: Power On
BIOS will turn on Legacy PM before booting the OS.
Figure 283: Power management

BIOS PM at boot Power Management is already enabled in Enabled Enables this function.
the boot phase.
APM available Under this option you can set whether the Yes Enables this function.
operating system is allowed to change the
BIOS power management settings. No Disables this function.
Table 150: BIOS power management menu


ACPI available The ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Yes Enables this function.
Power Interface) option is an extended
PnP and power management function. No Disables this function.
S1 clocks The processor can be "stopped" with this Off Disables this function.
option.
On Enables this function.
CPU clock gating During power management, the clock Enabled Enables this function.
lines are turned off for devices connected
to the CPU. Disabled Disables this function.
Chipset clock gating During power management, the clock Enabled Enables this function.
to the chipset. Disabled Disables this function.
Power button This option determines how ACPI mode When the power button is pressed and held for 4
the Power button will function. seconds, the Power Panel is switched off without
shutting down the operating system.
Instant off Turns off immediately.
Power Loss Control This option determines what should occur Power-on The device turns back on.
after a power failure.
Stay off Device remains off.
Table 150: BIOS power management menu (Forts.)
1.3.8 Device information
XpressROM Setup
Device Information
Version Factory Settings

MTCX FPGA: V1.00 Device ID: 000023BE
MTCX PX32: V1.14 Comp. ID: 0000
MTCX KCF : V0.00 Serial Nr: 91500168421
BIOS: V1.14 Product Name: 4PP420.1043-B5
FACT: V2.01 User ID: 00000000
Switches
Mode/Node: 02h
Ethernet MAC Address

ETH: 00:60:65:04:79:18
Return to Main Menu
Figure 284: Device information

MTXC FPGA The FPGA firmware version is displayed None -
here.
Table 151: BIOS device information menu


MTCX PX32 The MTCX firmware version is displayed None -
here.
MTCX KCF The KCF (Key Configuration File) version None -
is displayed here.
BIOS The BIOS version is displayed here. None -
FACT The version of the factory settings is None -
displayed here.
Mode/Node Displays the current mode/node switch None -
position.
ETH The MAC address of the Ethernet None -
interface is displayed here.
Device ID Hex value for the device code of the None -
Power Panel device.
Comp. ID The compatibility code of the Power Panel None -
device is displayed here.
Serial no. The serial number of the Power Panel None -
Product name The product name of the Power Panel None -
User ID Displays the User ID. None -
This 8 digit hex value can be freely
assigned by the user (e.g. to give the
device a unique ID) and can only be
changed with using the "B&R Control
Center" via the ADI driver.
Table 151: BIOS device information menu (Forts.)
Chapter 4
Software

1.3.9 Miscellaneous configuration
XpressROM Setup
Miscellaneous Configuration
Boot Logo Configuration

Boot Logo: Enabled
Clear Boot Logo: Enabled
Boot Logo Timeout: 00000
Summary Screen Configuration

Summary Screen: Enabled
Summary Screen Timeout: 00000
PC Speaker Configuration
AC Beeper: Enabled
Secutity Option
Password: None
Enable/Disable display of Boot Logo
Figure 285: Miscellaneous configuration

Boot logo1) Displays a boot logo while Disabled No boot logo displayed during booting.
the Power Panel is starting.
Enabled A B&R boot logo is displayed during booting
as long as no customized bitmap
is shown.
Clear boot logo BIOS clears the boot logo after startup in Disabled The boot logo is removed.
order to reduce the boot time.
Enabled Disables this function.
Boot logo timeout Defines the duration of the "Press DEL for 0 No waiting.
Setup" message on the display and how
much time the user has to change to the
BIOS configuration. 1-65535 [milliseconds] The system waits for the manually set value in
milliseconds and then resumes the boot
Information: procedure.
Can be resumed before the timeout

expires by pressing any button.
Summary screen Displays information about BIOS, VGA, Disabled Shows the summary screen.
VSA versions, devices found, etc.
Enabled Hides the summary screen.
Summary screen Defines how long the summary screen is 0 No waiting.
timeout displayed.
1-65535 [milliseconds] The system waits for the manually set value in
Information: milliseconds and then resumes the boot
procedure.
Table 152: BIOS miscellaneous configuration menu


AC beeper The tone that sounds after startup can be Disabled Disables this function.
turned on/off here.
Password A password for BIOS setup can be None No password.
specified here. No changes can be made
without entering the password. Enter password Enter a password manually (max. 8 characters).
Table 152: BIOS miscellaneous configuration menu (Forts.)
1) The standard B&R boot logo is pre-configured upon delivery.
1.3.10 Boot order
XpressROM Setup
Boot Order
Boot Order Configuration

1. USB Floppy Disk
2. USB CD-ROM Drive
3. Hard Drive
4. USB Hard Drive/Flash Drive
CF card Info
Model Number: No CF Card
Capabilities:
Phy. Geometry:
Log. Geometry:
Chapter 4
Software
Figure 286: Boot order


Boot order Configures the order in which memory USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive first.
configuration media is booted.
If two identical devices are selected, a USB CD-ROM
conflict warning is displayed. drive
1 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive
second.
USB CD-ROM
drive
2 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive third.
USB CD-ROM
drive
3 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive fourth.
USB CD-ROM
drive
4 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
Model number Displays the CompactFlash model ID. None -
Capabilities Displays the possible data transfer mode None -
speeds to and from an inserted
CompactFlash card.
Phy. geometry Displays the physical geometry of the None -
inserted CompactFlash card in cylinders,
heads and sectors.
Log. geometry Displays the logical geometry of the None -
heads and sectors.

1.3.11 Load defaults
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 21:56:12
Info
D. Date 08/21/2006
Defaults set!
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults
S. Save Values
Hit anyWithout
key to Exit
continue_
Figure 287: Load defaults
Under this BIOS menu item (shortcut "L"), by pressing any key you can load
the values that were set at the time BIOS setup was opened. All changes made up to that point
are lost as a result.
Chapter 4
Software
Restoring the default BIOS values
The BIOS default values can also be restored without entering the BIOS setup. For procedure,
see Section 1.5.8 "Restoring the default BIOS values", on page 461.

1.3.12 Save values without exit
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 21:56:12
Info
D. Date 08/21/2006
Settings Saved!
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults
S. Save Values
Hit anyWithout
key to Exit
continue_
Figure 288: Save values without exit
The BIOS values are saved using this menu item (shortcut "S") by pressing any key. The user
can then make additional settings or exit BIOS setup.

1.3.13 Exit without save
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 21:56:12 Exit Without Save

D. Date 08/21/2006
Are you sure you want to exit without Saving?
M. Memory an Cache Optimization No Yes
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

Figure 289: Exit without save
BIOS setup can be exited by selecting "Yes" under this menu item (shortcut "Q") without saving
any changes that might have been made. The system is then automatically restarted.
Information:
Chapter 4
Software
If using a German keyboard layout, press the "z" key to enter the "y".

1.3.14 Save values and exit
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 21:56:12 Save Values and Exit

D. Date 08/21/2006
Are you sure you want to save all values and exit?
M. Memory an Cache Optimization No Yes
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

Figure 290: Save values and exit
If "Yes" is selected under this menu item (X shortcut), the system saves the settings,
automatically exits BIOS setup, and reboots the system.
Information:

1.4 BIOS settings for QVGA Power Panel devices
Information:
The BIOS default values can be found in the section 1.5 "BIOS default values", on
page 459.
1.4.1 Main menu
Immediately after the DEL button is pressed during startup, the main BIOS setup menu appears.
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
>>T. Time 12:30:25
D. Date 04/19/2007

P. Power Management
H. Micellaneous Configuration
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

X. Save Values and Exit
Chapter 4
Software
Figure 291: Main menu
The individual menu items are explained in detail in the following sections.

T Time 00:02:56 The system time can be configured here.
D Date 03/12/2007 The system date can be configured here.
B Motherboard device Motherboard resources can be configured here.
configuration
M Memory and cache The settings for memory management can be made here.
optimization
C System clock/PLL The timing settings can be made here.
configuration
P Power management Setup of various APM (Advanced Power Management) options.
I Device information Important parameters (temp., mode/node position, etc.) for the Power Panel device.
H Miscellaneous configuration The various BIOS settings can be configured here (Summary screen, Halt on errors, etc.)
O Boot order The boot order can be set here.
L Load defaults Load the optimal BIOS settings for best performance.
Table 154: Overview of BIOS main menu functions


S Save values without exit Saves BIOS values without exiting BIOS setup.
Q Exit without save Exits BIOS setup without saving any changes.
X Save values and exit Saves settings and exits BIOS setup.
Table 154: Overview of BIOS main menu functions (Forts.)
1.4.2 Time
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
>>T. Time 12:30:25
D. Date 04/19/2007

P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

Main Menu/T. Time
Time:
TIME as HH:MM[:SS] (Sec. Optional)
Figure 292: Time
The currently configured system time is displayed here. The time is buffered by a battery (CMOS
battery) after the Power Panel device has been switched off.
By selecting the item "Time" and the confirming by pressing Enter, or using the shortcut "A", you
can enter a new system time. The format HH:MM[:SS] must be entered as follows:
Example: Set time to 13:00:00.
The entry can be made in three different ways using the keyboard:
13:00:00 - Confirm with Enter

13:00 - Confirm with Enter
13: - Confirm with Enter
Information:
If using a German keyboard, press the "Shift+" key to enter ":".

1.4.3 Date
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 12:30:25
>>D. Date 04/19/2007

P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

Main Menu/D. Date
Date:
Date as MM/DD/YYYY
Figure 293: Date
The current system date is displayed here. The date is buffered by a battery (CMOS battery)
after the Power Panel device has been switched off.
By selecting the item "Date" and the confirming by pressing Enter, or using the shortcut "B", you
can enter a new system date. The format MM:DD:YYYY must be entered as shown in the
following example:
Example: Set date to 2.12.2003.
Chapter 4
Software
Entry using keyboard:
02/12/2003 - Confirm with Enter
Information:
If using a German keyboard, press the "-" key (next to the Shift key) to enter "/".

XpressROM Setup
Motherboard Device Configuration
>>A. Drive Configuration
B. I/O Configuration
F. Video and Flat Panel
G. PCI Configuration
U. USB Configuration
T. Thermal Configuration
R. Return to Main Menu
Figure 294: Motherboard device configuration

A Drive configuration Settings for the floppy drive and CompactFlash card.
B I/O configuration Configuration of the I/O devices.
F Video and flat panel Displays the video settings and configuration for resolution, brightness, and contrast
display parameters.
G PCI Configuration Configures PCI bus settings.
U USB configuration Configures the USB settings.
T Thermal configuration Display of temperatures.
R Return to main menu Exits the current page and returns to the BIOS main menu.
Table 155: BIOS motherboard device configuration menu

Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration
XpressROM Setup
Drive Configuration
IDE Configuration
IDE BIOS Support: Enabled
DMA/UDMA BIOS Support: Enabled
>>Force mode for CF Card: Auto
Boot Support Configuration

Floppy BIOS Support: Enabled
CD-ROM Boot BIOS Support: Enabled
USB BIOS Support: Enabled
Figure 295: Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration

IDE BIOS support Displays the IDE configuration of the None -
inserted CompactFlash card.
DMA/UDMA BIOS Display of the DMA/UDMA BIOS support None -
support for the inserted CompactFlash card.
Force mode for CF The maximum data transfer mode to and Auto Configures the fastest mode supported by the
card from a CompactFlash card can be inserted CompactFlash card.
configured here.
Chapter 4
Software
PIO 0 to PIO 4 Manual configuration option for PIO mode.
Information: MDMA 0 to MDMA 2 Manual configuration option for MDMA mode.
If a mode is configured that is not UDMA 0 to UDMA 5 Manual configuration option for UDMA mode.
supported by the CompactFlash card,
then the fastest supported mode is
configured.
Floppy BIOS support Floppy support (USB) can be Enabled Floppy support activated.
Disabled Floppy support deactivated.
CD-ROM boot BIOS The CD-ROM boot BIOS support can be Enabled CD-ROM boot support activated.
support activated/deactivated here. Booting a connected USB
CD-ROM drive is possible.
Disabled CD-ROM boot support deactivated.
USB BIOS support USB BIOS support can be Enabled USB BIOS support activated.
Disabled USB BIOS support deactivated.

Motherboard device configuration - I/O configuration
XpressROM Setup
I/O Configuration
Serial Port Configuration
>>COM A: Disabled
COM C: 0x3f8 IRQ 4
COM D: 0x2f8 IRQ 3
Configure the 1st on-board UART.
Figure 296: Motherboard device configuration - I/O configuration

COM A Configures the UART address range and Disabled No assignment.
optional internal interface. 0x3f8 IRQ 4 Use this address range and interrupt.
0x2f8 IRQ 3
Information:
0x3e8 IRQ 4
COM C Configures the UART address range and Disabled No assignment. The serial interface is disabled.
external serial interface. 0x3f8 IRQ 4 Use this address range and interrupt.
0x2f8 IRQ 3
Information:
0x3e8 IRQ 4
0x3f8 IRQ 12
0x2f8 IRQ 11
0x3e8 IRQ 12
0x2e8 IRO 11
Table 157: BIOS super I/O configuration menu


COM D Configures the UART address range and Disabled No assignment. The touch screen is disabled and
the corresponding interrupt for the touch does not function.
controller.
0x3f8 IRQ 4 Use this address range and interrupt.
Information: 0x2f8 IRQ 3
Two ports cannot use the same 0x3e8 IRQ 4
address range and interrupt.
0x2e8 IRQ 3
0x3f8 IRQ 12
0x2f8 IRQ 11
0x3e8 IRQ 12
0x2e8 IRQ 11
Table 157: BIOS super I/O configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - video and flat panel
XpressROM Setup
Video and Flat Panel
>>Graphics Memory:008
Output display: Flat Panel
Flat Panel Configuration

Type: TFT
Contrast: AUTO
Brightness: AUTO
Chapter 4
Software
Select memory size in Mbyte.
Figure 297: Motherboard device configuration - video and flat panel configuration

Graphics memory Setting for the amount of graphics 2-254 Value set manually.
memory reserved by the main memory.
Output display Selection of display mode Flat panel Displays on a Power Panel display.
Panel and CRT Displays on an external monitor and Power Panel
display.
Type Displays the Power Panel display type. None -
Table 158: BIOS video configuration menu


Contrast Setting for the contrast of the display. Auto The optimal contrast is automatically configured
using the factory settings. A contrast value
Information: between 100% and 0% is set.
Contrast settings can only be 0% to 100% Manual setting of the desired contrast within
configured for passive displays. If the factory settings limits.
mode/node switches are set to 0/0,
then contrast settings are
automatically set to the default factory
settings every time the Power Panel
device is restarted.
Brightness Setting for the background lighting of the Auto The optimal brightness is automatically
display. configured using the factory settings. A
brightness value between 100% and 0% is set.
Information:
0% to 100% Manual setting of the desired brightness within
If the mode/node switch is set to 0/0, factory settings limits.
then brightness settings are
automatically set to the default values
from the factory settings every time the
Power Panel device is restarted.
Table 158: BIOS video configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - PCI configuration
XpressROM Setup
PCI Configuration
PCI Interrupt Steering
>>PCI INTA#: IRQ 10
PCI INTB#: IRQ 11
PCI INTC#: IRQ 10
PCI INTD#: IRQ 11
aPCI Slots
1st Module ID: NONE
Type:
Status: FPGA NFOUND
2nd Module ID: ee

Type:
Status: FPGA NFOUND
Enable/Disable INTA# to IRQ steering
Figure 298: Motherboard device configuration - PCI configuration

PCI INTA# Activates the IRQ for the Ethernet Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
controller.
14 or 15
PCI INTB# Activates IRQ for aPCI slot 1. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
First IRQ for aPCI slot 1 and IRQ for
USB controller. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14 or 15
Table 159: BIOS PCI configuration menu


PCI INTC# Activates IRQ for aPCI slot 2. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
First IRQ for aPCI slot 2 and IRQ for 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
IRQ for aPCI slot 1. 14 or 15
PCI INTD# Activates IRQ for the USB controller. Disabled No IRQ is reserved.
Second IRQ for aPCI slot 2. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, Manual configuration of the IRQ.
14 or 15
aPCI slots Information about aPCI modules located None -
in the aPCI slots of the
Power Panel device are displayed here.
Table 159: BIOS PCI configuration menu (Forts.)
Motherboard device configuration - USB configuration
XpressROM Setup
USB Configuration
USB 2.0 Settings
>>OHCI: Enabled
EHCI: Enabled
UDC: Disabled
OTG: Disabled
Overcurrent reporting: Disabled
Port 4 assignment: Host
Chapter 4
Software
Enable/Disable OHCI PCI header
Figure 299: Motherboard device configuration - USB configuration

OHCI Turns USB 1.0/1.1 support on/off (OHCI - Enabled Activates the USB port.
Open Host Controller Interface).
Disabled Deactivates the USB port.
EHCI Turns USB 2.0 support on/off (EHCI - Enabled Enables this function.
Enhanced Host Controller Interface).
UDC Turns the USB device controller on/off. Enabled Enables this function.
When on, only the PCI config space is
activated in BIOS. Disabled Disables this function.
OTG Turns the On-to-Go device on/off. Only Enabled Enables this function.
the PCI config space is activated in BIOS.


Overcurrent This function enables an automatic Enabled Enables this function.
reporting message
This function enables an automatic error Disabled Disables this function.
message to be sent to the system when
the USB hub is overloaded (e.g. in
Windows XP embedded).
Port 4 assignment With this option, USB port 4 can be Host Functions as host.
configured.
Device Functions as device (two computers can be
connected via port 4 - Master -> Slave).
Not used In BIOS, the default value (=Host) is assigned.
Motherboard device configuration - thermal configuration
XpressROM Setup
Thermal Configuration
Temperatures
CPU Intern: 51C
Board I/O: 39C
Fan: 0RPM
CMOS Battery: OK
>>Close Sub Menu
Figure 300: Motherboard device configuration - thermal configuration

CPU internal Displays the current internal processor None -
temperature.
Board I/O Indicates the current board I/O None -
temperature.
Fan Displays fan speed for the selected panel None -
(depending on features).
CMOS battery The status of the built-in CMOS battery is None -
displayed here.
Possible displays:
OK - Battery is ok, Bad - Battery
must be replaced.
Close submenu Close submenu Enter Closes the submenu.
Table 161: BIOS thermal configuration menu

Warning!
The parameters in this screen are for system designers, service personnel, and
technically competent users only. Only modify those settings that you completely
understand.
Incorrectly setting "Memory optimization" values can cause instability and even
cause the entire system not to boot. If the Power Panel can no longer be booted,
then the default BIOS values can be restored by pushing the reset button three times
(see section 1.5.8 "Restoring the default BIOS values", on page 461).
Information:
More detailed information about the meaning and effects of the settings can also be
found in the corresponding user's manual for the processor.
XpressROM Setup
Memory and Cache Optimization
Cache Mode: Write-Back
Cache Allocate: Disabled
>>Refresh Rate: Auto
Chapter 4
Software
Figure 301: Memory and cache optimization

Cache mode Using cache mode, write accesses are Write back The data is only written in the main memory if
determined on the cache. necessary (main memory and cache do not have
the same
information content).
Write through Data is written to the cache and to the main
memory.
Cache allocate The cache is divided into memory levels. Disabled Disables this function.
Table 162: BIOS memory and cache optimization menu


Refresh rate The refresh cycle can be set here. Auto Value selected automatically.
Information: 15s, 3s, 7s, 31s, Value set manually.

62s or 125s
Enter the clock frequency, the chipset
does the rest.
Table 162: BIOS memory and cache optimization menu (Forts.)
XpressROM Setup
System Clock/PLL Configuration
Clock Mode
>>Clock Determined By: H/W Strp.
Manual PLL Settings

CPU Multiplier: 500 Mhz
RAM Multiplier: 333 Mhz
Figure 302: System clock/PLL configuration

Clock determined by The processor clock can be set with this H/W strapping Value is set automatically.
option.
Manual Value must be set manually (CPU multiplier, RAM
multiplier).
CPU multiplier The CPU multiplier can be selected with None -
this option.
366 MHz, 400 MHz,
Manual.
RAM multiplier The RAM multiplier can be selected with None -
this option.
366 MHz, 400 MHz,
Manual.

XpressROM Setup
Power Management
>>BIOS PM at Boot: Disabled
APM Available: Yes

ACPI Available: Yes
S1 Clocks: Off
CPU Clock Gating: Enabled

Chipset Clock Gating: Enabled
Power Button Configuration

Power Button: ACPI Mode
Power Loss Control : Power On
BIOS will turn on Legacy PM
Figure 303: Power management

BIOS PM at boot Power Management is already enabled in Enabled Enables this function.
the boot phase.
APM available Under this option you can set whether the Yes Enables this function.
operating system is allowed to change the
BIOS power management settings. No Disables this function.
ACPI available The ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Yes Enables this function.
Chapter 4
Software
Power Interface) option is an extended
PnP and power management function. No Disables this function.
S1 clocks The processor can be "stopped" with this Off Disables this function.
option.
On Enables this function.
CPU clock gating During power management, the clock Enabled Enables this function.
to the CPU. Disabled Disables this function.
Chipset clock gating During power management, the clock Enabled Enables this function.
to the chipset. Disabled Disables this function.
Power button This option determines how ACPI mode When the power button is pressed and held for 4
the Power button will function. seconds, the Power Panel is switched off without
shutting down the operating system.
Instant off Turns off immediately.
Power Loss Control This option determines what should occur Power-on The device turns back on.
after a power failure.
Stay off Device remains off.
Table 164: BIOS power management menu

XpressROM Setup
Device Information
Version
MTCX FPGA: V1.00
MTCX PX32: V1.14
MTCX KCF : V0.00
BIOS: V1.14
Fact: V2.01
Switches
Mode/Node: 02h
Factory Settings
Device ID: 000023BA
Comp. ID: 0000
Serial Nr: 91460168421
Product Name: 4PP420.0571-65
User ID: 00000000
Ethernet MAC Address

ETH: 00:60:65:04:72:52
>> Return to Main Menu
Figure 304: Device information

MTXC FPGA The FPGA firmware version is displayed None -
here.
MTCX PX32 The MTCX firmware version is displayed None -
here.
MTCX KCF The KCF (Key Configuration File) version None -
is displayed here.
BIOS The BIOS version is displayed here. None -
Fact The version of the factory settings is None -
displayed here.
Mode/Node Displays the current mode/node switch None -
position.
Device ID Hex value for the device code of the None -
Power Panel device.
Comp. ID The compatibility code of the Power Panel None -
Serial no. The serial number of the Power Panel None -
Product name The product name of the Power Panel None -
User ID Displays the User ID. None -
This 8 digit hex value can be freely
assigned by the user (e.g. to give the
device a unique ID) and can only be
changed with using the "B&R Control
Center" via the ADI driver.
Table 165: BIOS device information menu


ETH The MAC address of the Ethernet None -
interface is displayed here.
Table 165: BIOS device information menu (Forts.)
XpressROM Setup
Miscellaneous
Boot Logo Configuration
>>Boot Logo: Enabled
Clear Boot Logo: Enabled
Boot Logo Timeout: 00000
Summary Screen Configuration

Summary Screen: Enabled
Summary Timeout: 00000
PC Speaker Configuration
AC Beeper: Enabled
Security Option
Password: None
Figure 305: Miscellaneous configuration
Chapter 4
Software
Boot logo1) Displays a boot logo while Disabled No boot logo displayed during booting.
the Power Panel is starting.
Enabled A B&R boot logo is displayed during booting
as long as no customized bitmap
is shown.
Clear boot logo BIOS automatically clears the boot logo Disabled The boot logo is removed.
after starting in order to reduce the boot
time. Enabled Disables this function.
Boot logo timeout Defines the duration of the "Press DEL for 0 No waiting.
Setup" message on the display and how
much time the user has to change to the
BIOS configuration. 1-65535 [milliseconds] The manually set value in milliseconds
that must pass before the boot process
Information: continues.
.
Summary screen Displays information about BIOS, VGA, Disabled Shows the summary screen.
VSA versions, devices found, etc.
Enabled Hides the summary screen.
Table 166: BIOS miscellaneous configuration menu


Summary timeout Defines how long the summary screen is 0 No waiting.
displayed.
1-65535 [milliseconds] The manually set value in milliseconds
Information: that must pass before the boot process
continues.
Can be resumed before the timeout .
AC beeper The tone that sounds after startup can be Disabled Disables this function.
turned on/off here.
Password A password for BIOS setup can be None No password.
specified here. No changes can be made
without entering the password. Enter password Enter a password manually (max. 8 characters).
Table 166: BIOS miscellaneous configuration menu (Forts.)
1) The standard B&R boot logo is pre-configured upon delivery.
1.4.10 Boot order
XpressROM Setup
Boot Order
Boot Order Configuration
>>1. USB Floppy Disk
2. USB CD-ROM Drive
3. Hard Drive
4. USB Hard/Flash Drv.
CF Card Info
Model:No CF Card
Cap.:
Phy.:
Log.:
Figure 306: Boot order


Boot order Configures the order in which memory USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive first.
configuration media is booted.
If two identical devices are selected, a USB CD-ROM
conflict warning is displayed. drive
1 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive
second.
USB CD-ROM
drive
2 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive third.
USB CD-ROM
drive
3 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
USB floppy disk The device attempts to boot from this drive fourth.
USB CD-ROM
drive
Chapter 4
Software
4 Hard drive
USB hard drive /
flash drive
None
Model number Displays the CompactFlash model ID. None -
Capabilities Displays the possible data transfer mode None -
speeds to and from an inserted
CompactFlash card.
Phy. geometry Displays the physical geometry of the None -
heads and sectors.
Log. geometry Displays the logical geometry of the None -
heads and sectors.

1.4.11 Load defaults
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 00:02:56
D. Date 03/12/2007

Info
Defaults set!
Hit any key to continue

Figure 307: Load defaults
Under this BIOS menu item (shortcut "L"), by pressing any key you can load
the values that were set at the time BIOS setup was opened. All changes made up to that point
are lost as a result.
Restoring the default BIOS values
The BIOS default values can also be restored without entering the BIOS setup. For procedure,
see Section 1.5.8 "Restoring the default BIOS values", on page 461.

1.4.12 Save values without exit
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 00:02:56
D. Date 03/12/2007

Info
Settings Saved!
Hit any key to continue
>>S. Save Values Without Exit

Saved the changed values to CMOS
Figure 308: Save values without exit
The BIOS values are saved using this menu item (shortcut "S") by pressing any key. The user
can then make additional settings or exit BIOS setup.
1.4.13 Exit without save
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
Chapter 4
Software
T. Time 00:02:56
D. Exit Without Save
Are you sure you want to
B. exit without Saving? on
M. >>No Yes
C.
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

>>Q. Exit Without Save
Exit without saving changes.
Figure 309: Exit without save
BIOS setup can be exited by selecting "Yes" under this menu item (shortcut "Q") without saving
any changes that might have been made. The system is then automatically restarted.

Information:
1.4.14 Save values and exit
XpressROM Setup
Main Menu
T. Time 00:02:56
D. Save Values and Exit
Are you sure you want to
B. save all values and exit? on
M. >>No Yes
C.
P. Power Management
O. Boot Order
L. Load Defaults

>>X. Save Values and Exit
Save all changes and Exit
Figure 310: Save values and exit
If "Yes" is selected under this menu item (X shortcut), the system saves the settings,
automatically exits BIOS setup, and reboots the system.
Information:

1.5 BIOS default values
The BIOS default values are the BIOS settings that were already configured when the PPC300
was delivered. The BIOS default values are identical in all variants (QVGA, VGA, SVGA and
XGA).
Drive configuration Default value

IDE BIOS support Enabled
DMA/UDMA BIOS support Enabled
Force mode for CF card Auto
Floppy BIOS support Enabled
CD-ROM boot BIOS support Enabled
USB BIOS support Enabled
I/O configuration
COM A Disabled
COM C 0x3f8 IRQ 4
COM D 0x2f8 IRQ 3
Video and flat panel configuration
Graphics memory 008
Output display -
Type -
Chapter 4
Software
Contrast Auto
Brightness Auto
PCI Configuration
PCI INTA# IRQ 10
PCI INTB# IRQ 11
PCI INTC# IRQ 10
PCI INTD# IRQ 11
USB configuration
OHCI Enabled
EHCI Enabled
UDC Disabled
OTG Disabled
Overcurrent reporting Disabled
Port 4 assignment Host
Thermal configuration
CPU internal -
Board I/O -
Table 168: Motherboard device configuration default values

Drive configuration Default value

Fan -
Battery -
Table 168: Motherboard device configuration default values (Forts.)
Setting Default value

Cache mode Write back
Cache allocate Disabled
Refresh rate Auto
Table 169: Memory and cache optimization default values

Clock determined by H/W strapping
CPU multiplier 500 MHz
RAM multiplier 333 MHz
Table 170: System clock/PLL configuration default values

BIOS PM at boot Disabled
APM available Yes
ACPI available Yes
S1 clocks Off
CPU clock gating Enabled
Chipset clock gating Enabled
Power button ACPI mode
Power Loss Control Power-on
Table 171: Power management default values
This BIOS page is only provided for information purposes - therefore, no default BIOS values are
available.


Boot logo Enabled
Clear boot logo Enabled
Boot logo timeout 00000
Summary screen Enabled
Summary screen timeout 00000
AC beeper Enabled
Password None
Table 172: Miscellaneous configuration default values
1.5.7 Boot order

1. USB floppy disk
2. USB CD-ROM drive
3. Hard drive
4. USB hard drive / flash drive
Table 173: Boot order default values
1.5.8 Restoring the default BIOS values
Chapter 4
In the event that the BIOS settings become incorrectly defined (e.g. USB Keyboard Support
Software
disabled, crash during operating system startup), the BIOS default values can be restored using
the following procedure.
Procedure:
Switch mode/node switches to 0-0.

Press the reset button three times (procedure: press - wait for beep - press - wait for beep
- press - wait for beep).

1.6 Software updates
The following Power Panel device software and firmware can be updated:
BIOS (see page 470)

MTCX firmware (see page 473)
aPCI firmware (see page 475)
User Boot Logo (see page 476)
Current software can be downloaded directly from the service portal on the B&R homepage
(www.br-automation.com).
The version information can be found in the corresponding BIOS setup pages, or via ADI
"Control Center" (included in Windows XP embedded and Windows CE).
1.7 CMOS backup
To protect CMOS data, a CMOS backup has been integrated into BIOS. If the BIOS setup was
ended using "Save values and exit" and the Power Panel device was successfully restarted, then
the CMOS data is burned to flash memory. If the CMOS checksum is incorrect during startup
(battery empty) or the Power Panel device cannot be booted correctly on three consecutive
attempts, then the salvaged data from flash memory is copied again to CMOS. Setup is back to
its original state, except for the time.

1.8 Distribution of resources
1.8.1 RAM address assignment
RAM address Resource

00000000 - 000003FF Interrupt vectors
00000400 - 000004FF BIOS data area
00000500 - 0009FBFF Freely available for the operating system (MS-DOS program area)
0009FC00 - 0009FFFF Advanced BIOS data area
000A0000 - 000BFFFF VGA memory
000C0000 - 000C7FFF VGA BIOS
000C8000 - 000CBFFF Reserved
000CC000 - 000EFFFF XpressROM expansion ROMS. Unused areas can be used for HMA.
000F0000 - 000FFFFF XpressROM BIOS
00100000 - BC_RAM_TOP Remaining DRAM and VGA memory
D0000000 - FBFFFFFF PCI memory and PCI ROM (are dynamically assigned during POST)
FFE00000 - FFFFFFFF High BIOS area (flash memory)
Table 174: RAM address assignment
1.8.2 DMA channel assignment
DMA channel Resource

0 Freely available
Chapter 4
Software
1 Freely available
2 Freely available
3 Freely available
4 Freely available
5 Freely available
6 Freely available
7 Freely available
Table 175: DMA channel assignment

1.8.3 I/O address assignment
I/O address Resource

0000 - 000F DMA controller channels 0-3
0020 - 0021 Master programmable interrupt controller
0022 - 0023 CPU configuration registers
0040 - 0043 Programmable interval timer
0060 - 0066 Keyboard controller (emulated by Legacy USB)
0070 - 0071 RTC (real-time clock)
0072 - 0073 Extended RTC (real-time clock)
0080 BIOS POST debug output port
0081 - 0083 DMA channel low page registers
0084 VSA debug output port
0085 - 008F DMA channel low page registers
0092 Port A control register
00A0 - 00A1 Slave programmable interrupt controller
00C0 - 00CF DMA controller channels 4-7
00D0 - 00DF DMA status/control/mode registers channel 0-7
00F0 - 00F1 Co-processor error register
015C - 015D On-chip SIO configuration
0170 - 0177 Primary IDE
01F0 - 01F7 Primary IDE
0220 - 02E8 Audio (not supported)
02EF - 02FF COM2
0376 - 0377 Secondary IDE channel
03B0 - 03BB Video controller
03C0 - 03DF Video controller
03E8 - 03EF COM3
03F0 - 03F5 Floppy controller (emulated by Legacy USB)
03F6 - 03F7 Primary IDE
03F8 - 03FF COM1
0480 - 048F DMA channel high page registers
04D0 - 04D1 Interrupt edge/level registers
0CF8 - 0CFF PCI configuration registers
Table 176: I/O address assignment
In addition, the I/O addresses that were selected for additional functions (COM, etc.) are
assigned.

1.8.4 Interrupt assignment
Interrupt Resource
IRQ 0 System timer
IRQ 1 Keyboard (Legacy USB emulation)
IRQ 2 2nd PIC IRQ cascade
IRQ 3 COM2 1)
IRQ 4 COM1 1)
IRQ 5 PCI configuration space
IRQ 6 Disk drive
IRQ 8 RTC (real-time clock)
IRQ 11 COM3 1)
IRQ 12 PS/2 mouse (Legacy USB emulation)
IRQ 13 FPU (co-processor)
IRQ 14 Primary IDE (primary hard disk)
Table 177: Interrupt assignment
1) BIOS setup default setting.
Chapter 4
Software

Software Power Panel 300/400 with Automation Runtime
2. Power Panel 300/400 with Automation Runtime
B&R Automation Runtime guarantees a uniform runtime environment for Automation Studio
programs on all target systems. This ensures uniform programming and operation on all devices.
Automation Runtime possesses a multitasking operating system adapted especially for use with
control technology. The cycle time for your application can be separated among several task
classes. Automation Runtime ensures that all application programs are executed within defined
time periods, proving itself to be a configurable, deterministic real-time multitasking system.
An extensive project can be divided into small individual tasks. This way of working increases
modularity and makes it much easier to maintain projects.
2.1.1 Summary screen
When switching on a Power Panel 300/400 device, a summary screen displays the most
important parameters of an Automation Runtime Power Panel device:
4PP420.1043-75
PX32: V01.11 Boot BIOS: V01.14
FPGA: V01.00
FACT: V02.01 Device ID: 23BDh
Revision: C0 S/N: 91490168421

MAC Address: 00:60:65:00:C6:A7
Mode/Node: Cfh
Figure 311: Automation Runtime summary screen - ex. 4PP420.1043-75
Information Example value Meaning

PX32 V01.11 Displays the MTCX PX32 firmware version.
FPGA V01.00 Displays the MTCX FPGA firmware version.
FACT V02.01 Displays the factory settings version. These factory settings determine the device ID, display ID, display-
specific initialization sequences, and other important parameters.
Information:
Factory settings are set by B&R and cannot be changed by the user.
Boot BIOS V01.14 Displays the BIOS boot version.
Device ID 23BDh Displays the hexadecimal value of the hardware device number.
Revision C0 Hardware revision of the Power Panel.
S/N 91270168459 Displays the Power Panel device series number.
MAC address 00:60:65:00:C6:A7 Displays the assigned media access control (MAC) address.
Mode/Node Cfh Displays the current operating mode switch positions.
Table 178: Automation Runtime summary screen

2.2 Control and visualization with the Power Panel 300 device
The visualization project runs on the Power Panel 300. Serial RS232 or Ethernet TCP/IP
provides the communication to the controller system. Flexible programming with frame drivers
or Ethernet socket services allows a connection to be made to any control system. I/O
peripherals and drives are connected to the controller.
Visualisation & Operation
Power Panel
RS232 or Ethernet
Control system
X20 System
Chapter 4
Software
Compact
X20 System I/O System
Remote I/O systems
ACOPOS ACOPOS
Drive technology
Figure 312: Power Panel 300 as an intelligent visualization system

2.3 Power Panel 400 with Power Panel 300 terminals
The control program and the visualization run on the Power Panel 400. I/O peripherals and
drives are connected via CAN X2X or POWERLINK. Other Power Panel 300 units are connected
as terminals via Ethernet TCP/IP. Central data storage takes place on the Power Panel 400.
Power Panel 300 Power Panel 300 Power Panel 300
Visualization &
Operation
Ethernet
Control system
Visualization & Operation
Power Panel 400
Compact
X20 System I/O System
Remote I/O systems
ACOPOS ACOPOS
Drive technology
Figure 313: Power Panel 400 with, e.g. Power Panel 300 terminals
A CompactFlash is required in the Power Panel 300 and Power Panel 400 terminal devices.

2.4 Software updates
The following Power Panel Automation Runtime device software and firmware can be updated:
BIOS (see page 470)

MTCX firmware (see page 473)
Current software can be downloaded directly from the service portal on the B&R homepage
The version information can be found in the corresponding BIOS setup pages, or via ADI
"Control Center" (included in Windows XP embedded and Windows CE).
Chapter 4
Software

Software Upgrade information
3. Upgrade information
Information:
Starting with BIOS Version V1.16, Automation Runtime devices can boot using
bootable USB media (USB floppy drives, USB flash drives, etc.) in Mode/Node
switch setting "00".
Otherwise the upgrade must be done using a CompactFlash card.
Information:
The upgrade can be made using a bootable medium or via the B&R control center.
See the B&R ADI help for more information about upgrading via the B&R Control
Center.
3.1 BIOS upgrade
An upgrade might be necessary for the following reason:
To update implemented functions or to add newly implemented functions or components

to the BIOS setup (information about changes can be found in the Readme files of the
BIOS upgrade).
A current BIOS upgrade can be downloaded directly from the service portal on the B&R
homepage (www.br-automation.com).
3.1.1 What information do I need?
Information:
Individually saved BIOS settings are deleted when upgrading the BIOS.

3.1.2 Procedure
The following steps should be carried out to upgrade or save BIOS:
Create bootable media.
Information:
In MS-DOS, Win95 and Win98, a blank HD disk can be made bootable using the
command line command "sys a:" or "format a: /s".
Information concerning creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP can be found on
page 479.
Information concerning creating a USB flash drive for a B&R upgrade can be found
on page 481.
Information concerning creating a CompactFlash card for a B&R upgrade can be

found on page 483.
Copy the contents of the *.zip file to the bootable media. If the B&R upgrade was already
added when the bootable media was created using the B&R Embedded OS Installer, then
this step is not necessary.
Connect the bootable media to the Power Panel and reboot the device. See section
"Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration", on page 421 for the necessary
settings for the Power Panel device when booting from a diskette.
Chapter 4
Software
The following start menu will be shown after booting.
Microsoft Windows Startup Menu

===================================
1. Update BIOS
2. Save BIOS
3. Exit
Enter a choice:_
Figure 314: BIOS upgrade start menu

Item Menu item Description

1 Update BIOS All areas of BIOS are automatically upgraded (default after 5 seconds).
Information:
Settings that have been changed in BIOS setup must be set again after the
update.
The update process may not be interrupted, as the Power Panel could no longer
be started, and would have to be sent to B&R for repair. Try to repeat an
interrupted update process WITHOUT restarting the Power Panel, e.g. by starting
the batch file UPDBIOS.BAT directly.
2 Save BIOS BIOS is automatically saved in the SAVED directory.
Information:
It's necessary to have up to 256 kB of free space on the disk.
3 Exit Returns to the shell (MS-DOS).
Table 179: BIOS upgrade menu description
Information:
If you do not press a button within 5 seconds, then step 1 "Update BIOS" is
automatically carried out and the Power Panel is automatically updated.
The system must be rebooted after a successful upgrade.

3.2 MTCX Firmware upgrade (MTCX FPGA, MTCX PX32)
A current MTCX Firmware (MTCX FPGA and MTCX PX32) upgrade can be downloaded directly
from the service portal on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
3.2.1 Procedure
To carry out a firmware upgrade, the following steps should be taken:
Information:
page 479.
on page 481.

found on page 483.
Chapter 4
Software
Connect the bootable media to the Power Panel and reboot the device.
A boot menu with the following options is displayed after booting:

===================================
1. Upgrade MTCX Firmware FPGA and PX32 (PC3F/PC3P)

2. Exit
Enter a choice:_
Figure 315: MTCX upgrade start menu

Concerning item 1:
The MTCX Firmware FPGA and PX32 is automatically updated (default after 5 sec).
Warning!
The upgrade procedure must not be interrupted! Otherwise, the Power Panel may
no longer restart, and must be sent to B&R for repair. Try to repeat an interrupted
upgrade process WITHOUT restarting the Power Panel, e.g. by starting the batch file
UPDMTCX.BAT directly.
Concerning item 2:
Returns to the shell (MS-DOS).
Select the desired action.

Remove the bootable media and reboot the device (only after a successful update!).

3.3 aPCI firmware upgrade disk
A software tool for backing up or upgrading aPCI firmware can be downloaded directly from the
service portal of the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
3.3.1 Procedure
The following steps should be taken to upgrade the aPCI module firmware:
Information:
page 479.
on page 481.

found on page 483.
Chapter 4
Software
If there are already aPCI modules connected to the Power Panel and BIOS V1.04 is
installed, then the file name can be determined automatically by XFLASH.EXE.
Otherwise, the filename is queried by XFLASH.EXE or a default file name is used:
"apci1.rom" for aPCI slot 1, "apci2.rom" for aPCI slot 2 -> the aPCI firmware file must be
renamed beforehand!
Information:
The appropriate aPCI firmware files are available from B&R.
"Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration", on page 421 for Power Panel
devices for the necessary settings for the Power Panel device when booting from a
diskette.
The following start menu will be shown after booting:


===================================
1. Update FPGA firmware automatically

2. Update FPGA firmware of aPCI slot 1
3. Update FPGA firmware of aPCI slot 2
4. Save FPGA firmware of both aPCI slots
5. Exit
Enter a choice:_
Figure 316: aPCI firmware upgrade start menu

1 Update FPGA firmware automatically The firmware for both aPCI slots is automatically updated (default after 5 seconds).
Information:
According to the inserted modules, the aPCI FPGA firmware files are searched
for automatically.
2 Update FPGA firmware of aPCI slot 1 Only firmware from aPCI slot 1 is updated.
Information:
If no aPCI module is present, the aPCI FPGA firmware file must be renamed
"apci1.pci" (for aPCI slot 1) before updating.
3 Update FPGA firmware of aPCI slot 2 Only firmware from aPCI slot 2 is updated.
Information:
If no aPCI module is present, the aPCI FPGA firmware file must be renamed
"apci2.pci" (for aPCI slot 2) before updating.
4 Save FPGA firmware of both aPCI slots Firmware for both aPCI slots are automatically saved.
Information:
Table 180: aPCI firmware upgrade menu description
Information:
If you do not press a button within 5 seconds, then step 1 "Update FPGA firmware
automatically" is automatically carried out and the Power Panel is automatically
updated.
3.4 User boot logo upgrade disk
A software tool for updating, backing up, or deleting the user boot logo can be downloaded
directly from the service portal of the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

3.4.1 Procedure
The following steps should be taken to update, save or delete a user boot logo:
Information:
page 479.
on page 481.

found on page 483.
Create the user boot logo according to section 3.4.2 "Guidelines for creating a user boot
logo", on page 478 and copy to the bootable media.
"Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration", on page 421 for the necessary
settings for the Power Panel device when booting from a diskette.
Chapter 4
Software
The following start menu will be shown after booting.

===================================
1. Update BIOS User Boot Logo

2. Update BIOS Default Boot Logo
3. Save BIOS Boot Logo
4. Delete BIOS Boot Logo
5. Exit
Enter a choice:_
Figure 317: User boot logo upgrade start menu

1 Update BIOS user boot logo The user boot logo is automatically updated with the file USERLOGO.ROM (default
after 5 seconds).
2 Update BIOS default boot logo The BIOS default boot logo for the device is automatically updated with the correct
resolution.
Table 181: User boot logo upgrade menu description


3 Save BIOS boot logo The user boot logo is automatically saved in the file BOOTLOGO.SAV.
Information:
4 Delete BIOS boot logo An existing user boot logo is deleted in the flash.
Table 181: User boot logo upgrade menu description (Forts.)
Information:
If you do not press a button within 5 seconds, then step 1 "Update BIOS User Boot
Logo" is automatically carried out and the Power Panel is automatically updated.

In the BIOS CMOS setup, the display of the boot logo must be set from "No" to "Yes" (see
section 1.3.9 "Miscellaneous configuration", on page 432).
3.4.2 Guidelines for creating a user boot logo
To update the user boot logo, a bitmap must be created according to the following guidelines and
then copied to the user boot logo upgrade disk:
1) A Windows bitmap with a maximum of 256 colors must be created with the appropriate
resolution for the Power Panel: 320x240 (QVGA), 640x480 (VGA), 800x600 (SVGA) or
1024x768 (XGA). The bitmap is not allowed to be compressed.
2) Since status messages are output on the top of the display when booting the Power Panel,
there should not be any user boot logo pixels positioned here in the bitmap (approximately
10 rows of pixels), as these would be covered up. These status messages use bitmap palette
index 0 as the background color and index 7 as the foreground color (starting from BIOS
V1.05; index 63 with older versions).
3) Using the utility USERLOGO.EXE, the bitmap file must then be converted into a ROM file
that can be read by BIOS (please refer to the online help for the utility for more instructions
about this).
4) The userlogo.rom file created by the utility is only permitted to have a maximum size of
192 KB. If this size is exceeded, a warning appears. The user can e.g. reduce the details in
the Windows bitmap in order not to exceed the maximum byte size.
5) After this, the userlogo.rom file should be copied to the disk.

3.5 Creating a DOS boot diskette in Windows XP
Place an empty 1.44 MB HD diskette in the disk drive.

Open Windows Explorer.
Right-click on the 3" floppy icon and select "Format...".
Figure 318: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 1
Chapter 4
Software
Then select the checkbox "Create an MS-DOS startup disk", press "Start" and
acknowledge the warning message with "OK".

After creating the startup disk, some of the files must be deleted because of the size of the
update.
When doing this, all files (hidden, system files, etc.) must be shown on the diskette.
In Explorer, go to the Tools menu, select Folder Options... and open the View tab. Now
deactivate the option Hide protected operating system files (Recommended) (activated by
default) and activate the option Show hidden files and folders.
before after
Now all files (marked) except Command.com, IO.sys and MSDOS.sys can be deleted.

3.6 Creating a bootable USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files
When used in connection with a B&R industrial PC, it is possible to upgrade BIOS from one of
the USB flash drives available from B&R. To do this, the USB flash drive must be prepared
accordingly. This is done with the B&R Embedded OS Installer, which can be downloaded for
free from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
3.6.1 Requirements
The following peripherals are required for creating a bootable USB flash drive:
B&R USB flash drive

B&R Industrial PC
USB Media Drive
B&R Embedded OS Installer (V3.00 or higher)
3.6.2 Procedure
Connect the USB flash drive to the PC.

If the drive list is not refreshed automatically, the list must be updated using the command
Drives > Refresh.
Mark the desired USB flash drive in the drive list.
Change to the Action tab and select Install a B&R Update to a USB flash drive as type
of action.
Chapter 4
Software
Enter the path to the MS-DOS operating system files. If the files are part of a ZIP archive,
then click on the button By ZIP file.... If the files are stored in a directory on the hard drive,
then click on the button By folder....
In the B&R Upgrade text box, it's also possible to enter the path to the ZIP file for the
B&R Upgrade Disk and select the file.
Click on the Start action button in the toolbar.

Figure 323: Creating a USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files
3.6.3 Where do I get MS-DOS?
Information concerning creating an MS-DOS boot diskette can be found in section 3.5 "Creating
a DOS boot diskette in Windows XP", on page 479. Then the files from the diskette are to be
copied to your hard drive.

3.7 Creating a bootable CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files
When used in connection with a B&R industrial PC, it is possible to upgrade BIOS from one of
the CompactFlash cards available from B&R. To do this, the CompactFlash card must be
prepared accordingly. This is done with the B&R Embedded OS Installer, which can be
downloaded for free from the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
3.7.1 Requirements
The following peripherals are required for creating a bootable CompactFlash card:
CompactFlash card
B&R Industrial PC
B&R Embedded OS Installer (V3.10 or higher)
3.7.2 Procedure
Insert the CompactFlash card in the CF slot on the industrial PC.

If the drive list is not refreshed automatically, the list must be updated using the command
Drives > Refresh.
Select the desired CompactFlash card from the drive list.
Change to the Action tab and select Install a B&R Update to a CompactFlash card as
type of action.
Enter the path to the MS-DOS operating system files. If the files are part of a ZIP archive,
Chapter 4
then click on the button By ZIP file.... If the files are stored in a directory on the hard drive,
Software
then click on the button By folder....
In the B&R Upgrade text box, it's also possible to enter the path to the ZIP file for the
B&R Upgrade Disk and select the file.
Click on the Start action button in the toolbar.

Figure 324: Creating a CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files
3.7.3 Where do I get MS-DOS?
Information concerning creating an MS-DOS boot diskette can be found in section 3.5 "Creating
a DOS boot diskette in Windows XP", on page 479. Then the files from the diskette are to be
copied to your hard drive.

Software Power Panel with Windows CE
4. Power Panel with Windows CE
Figure 325: Windows CE logo

5SWWCE.0521-ENG WinCE5.0 Pro PP300 LX800
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional, English; for PP300 BIOS devices 5PP320.0571-29,
5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39, 5PP320.1505-39,
order CompactFlash separately (at least 128 MB).
5SWWCE.0621-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus PP300 LX800
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional Plus, English; for PP300 BIOS devices
5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
5SWWCE.0622-ENG WinCE5.0 ProPlus PP400 LX800
Chapter 4
Software
Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional plus, English; for Power Panel 400 BIOS;
Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 Professional, English, including license; for PP300 BIOS devices
5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
Table 182: Model numbers - Windows CE
B&R Windows CE is an operating system which is optimally tailored to B&R's devices. It includes
only the functions and modules which are required by each device. This makes this operating
system extremely robust and stable. A further advantage of B&R Windows CE compared to other
operating systems are the low licensing costs.

4.2 Windows CE 5.0 features
Detailed information about Windows CE for B&R devices can be downloaded in the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
Features Windows CE 5.0

Supported screen resolutions QVGA (LCD), VGA (TFT), SVGA (TFT), XGA (TFT)
Color depth 16-bit / 65,536 colors1)
Graphics card driver AMD Geode LX graphics card driver with screen rotation without DirectX
Main memory Automatic detection and use of up to 512 MB RAM
Boot time / Startup time Approx. 20 seconds
Screen rotation The desktop can be turned in 90 intervals
Web browser Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE
.NET Compact Framework 2.0 with SP1
Image size Pro: Approx. 28 MB uncompressed
ProPlus: Approx. 30 MB uncompressed2)
Custom keys Supported
PVI Supported
Automation Device Interface Supported
Remote Desktop Protocol for thin clients Supported
B&R VNC Viewer Supported
B&R Task Manager Supported
B&R Picture Viewer Supported
Compatible with zenOn Yes
Compatible with Wonderware Yes
Serial interfaces for any use 1
Table 183: Windows CE 5.0 features
1) The color depth depends on the display used.

2) Use the function "Compress Windows CE Image" in the B&R Embedded OS Installer to reduce the image size.

4.3 Windows CE 6.0 features
Detailed information about Windows CE for B&R devices can be downloaded in the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
Features Windows CE 6.0

Supported screen resolutions QVGA (LCD), VGA (TFT), SVGA (TFT), XGA (TFT)
Color depth Default: 16-bit / 65,536 colors
(can be changed to 32-bit using the B&R Control Center)1)
Graphics card driver AMD Geode LX graphics card driver with screen rotation without DirectX
Main memory Automatic detection and use of up to 512 MB RAM
Boot time / Startup time Approx. 25 seconds
Screen rotation The desktop can be turned in 90 intervals
Web browser Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE
.NET Compact Framework 3.5
Image size Approx. 28 MB uncompressed2)
Custom keys Supported
PVI Supported
Automation Device Interface Supported
Remote Desktop Protocol for thin clients Supported
B&R VNC Viewer Supported
B&R Task Manager Supported
B&R Picture Viewer Supported
Compatible with zenOn Yes
Chapter 4
Software
Compatible with Wonderware Yes
Serial interfaces for any use 1
Table 184: Windows CE 6.0 features
1) The color depth depends on the display used.

2) Use the function "Compress Windows CE Image" in the B&R Embedded OS Installer to reduce the image size.
4.4 Differences between Windows CE 6.0 and Windows CE 5.0
2 GB of virtual RAM per process (Windows CE 5.0: 32 MB).

Simultaneous operation of up to 32,000 processes (Windows CE 5.0: 32 processes).

4.5 Requirements
The device must fulfill the following criteria to be able run the Windows CE operating system.
At least 128 MB main memory.

At least one 128 MB CompactFlash card (size should be specified when ordered).
4.6 Installation
Windows CE is usually preinstalled at the B&R plant.
4.6.1 B&R Embedded OS Installer
The B&R Embedded OS Installer allows you to install existing B&R Windows CE images. The
four files (NK.BIN, BLDR, LOGOXRES.BMP, and LOGOQVGA.BMP) must be provided from an
already functioning B&R Windows CE installation.
The B&R Embedded OS Installer can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R
homepage (www.br-automation.com). Further information is available in the online help for the
B&R Embedded OS Installer.

Software Power Panel with Windows XP embedded
5. Power Panel with Windows XP embedded
Figure 326: Windows XP embedded Logo

5SWWXP.0421-ENG WinXPe FP2007 PP300 LX800
Microsoft Windows XP embedded, English, Feature Pack 2007; for PP300 BIOS devices
5PP320.0571-29, 5PP320.0571-39, 5PP320.0573-39, 5PP320.1043-39, 5PP320.1214-39,
5PP320.1505-39, order CompactFlash separately (at least 512 MB). Only delivered with a
new Power Panel.
5SWWXP.0422-ENG WinXPe FP2007 PP400 LX800
Microsoft Windows XP Embedded Feature Pack 2007, English; for Power Panel 400;
Table 185: Model number overview - Windows XP embedded
Windows XP embedded is the modular version of the desktop operating system Windows XP
Professional. Windows XP embedded is based on the same binary files as Windows XP
Professional and is optimally tailored to the hardware being used. In other words, only the
Chapter 4
Software
functions and modules required by the respective device are included. Windows XP embedded
is also based on the same reliable code as Windows XP Professional. It provides industry with
leading reliability, improvements in security and performance, and the latest technology for Web
browsing and extensive device support.
5.2 Features with FP2007 (Feature Pack 2007)
The feature list shows the most important device functions in Windows XP embedded with
Feature Pack 2007 (FP2007).
Function Present
Enhanced write filter (EWF)
File Based Write Filter
Page file Configurable
Administrator account
User account Configurable
Explorer shell
Table 186: Device functions in Windows XP embedded with FP2007

Software Power Panel with Windows XP embedded
Function Present
Registry filter
Internet Explorer 6.0 + SP2
Internet information service (IIS) -
Terminal service
Windows Firewall
MSN-Explorer -
Outlook Express -
Administrative Tools
Remote Desktop
Remote Assistance -
.NET Framework -
ASP.NET -
Codepages/User Locale/Keyboard
Disk Management Service
Windows Installer Service
Class Installer
CoDevice Installer
Media Player -
DirectX -
Accessories
Number of fonts 89
Table 186: Device functions in Windows XP embedded with FP2007 (Forts.)
5.3 Installation
Windows XP embedded is generally preinstalled at B&R Austria on a suitable CompactFlash

card (min. 512 MB - must be specified when placing order). The system is then automatically
configured after it has been switched on for the first time. This procedure takes approximately 30
minutes, and the device will be rebooted a number of times.
Brief instructions for creating your own Windows XP embedded images or a suitable Target
Designer export file can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage

Software Power Panel with Windows Embedded Standard 2009
6. Power Panel with Windows Embedded Standard 2009
Figure 327: Windows Embedded Standard 2009 Logo

5SWWXP.0721-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 PP300 LX800
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded, Standard 2009, English; for Power Panel 300; order
CompactFlash separately (at least 1 GB).
5SWWXP.0722-ENG Windows Embedded Standard 2009 PP400 LX800
Microsoft OEM Windows Embedded Standard 2009, English; for Power Panel 400;
Order CompactFlash separately (min.1 GByte).
Table 187: Model numbers - Windows Embedded Standard 2009
Windows XP Embedded Standard 2009 is the modular version of the desktop operating system
Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3. Windows Embedded Standard 2009 is based on
the same binary files as Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3 and is optimally tailored
to the hardware being used. In other words, only the functions and modules required by the
Chapter 4
Software
respective device are included. Windows Embedded Standard 2009 is also based on the same
reliable code as Windows XP Professional with SP3. It provides industry with leading reliability,
improvements in security and performance, and the latest technology for Web browsing and
extensive device support.

6.2 Features with WES2009 (Windows Embedded Standard 2009)
The feature list shows the most important device functions in Windows Embedded Standard
2009.
Function Present
Enhanced write filter (EWF)
File Based Write Filter
Page file Configurable
Administrator account
User account Configurable
Explorer shell
Registry filter
Internet Explorer 7.0
Internet information service (IIS) -
Terminal service
Windows Firewall
MSN-Explorer -
Outlook Express -
Administrative Tools
Remote Desktop
Remote Assistance -
.NET Framework -
ASP.NET -
Local Network Bridge
Codepages/User Locale/Keyboard
Disk Management Service
Windows Installer Service
Class Installer
CoDevice Installer
Media Player 6.4
DirectX 9.0c
Accessories
Number of fonts 89
Table 188: Device functions in Windows Embedded Standard 2009

6.3 Installation
Upon request, Windows Embedded Standard 2009 can be preinstalled at B&R Austria on a
suitable CompactFlash card (min. 1GB). The PP300/400 system is then automatically
configured after it has been switched on for the first time. This procedure takes approximately 30
minutes, and the device will be rebooted a number of times.
6.4 Drivers
All drivers required for operation are preinstalled on the operating system. If an older driver
version is installed, the latest version can be downloaded from the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com) and installed. A potentially activated "Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)" must be
taken into consideration.
6.4.1 Touch screen driver
The touch screen driver must be manually installed in order to operate Automation Panel 800 or
Automation Panel 900 touch screen devices. The driver can be downloaded from the download
area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com). A potentially activated "Enhanced
Write Filter (EWF)" must be taken into consideration.
Information:
Required drivers can only be downloaded from the B&R homepage, not from
manufacturers' pages.
Chapter 4
Software

Software VESA mode support
7. VESA mode support
The following VESA standards (see www.vesa.org) are supported.
VESA mode Resolution

101h 640 x 480 x 8
103h 800 x 600 x 8
105h 1024 x 768 x 8
107h 1280 x 1024 x 8
110h 640 x 480 x 15
111h 640 x 480 x 16
112h 640 x 480 x 24
113h 800 x 600 x 15
114h 800 x 600 x 16
115h 800 x 600 x 24
116h 1024 x 768 x 15
117h 1024 x 768 x 16
118h 1024 x 768 x 24
119h 1280 x 1024 x 15
11Ah 1280 x 1024 x 16
11Bh 1280 x 1024 x 24
121h 320 x 240 x 8

122h 320 x 240 x 15
123h 320 x 240 x 16
124h 320 x 240 x 24
125h 1152 x 864 x 8
126h 1152 x 864 x 15
127h 1152 x 864 x 16
128h 1152 x 864 x 24
131h 1600 x 1200 x 8
132h 1600 x 1200 x 15
133h 1600 x 1200 x 16
134h 1600 x 1200 x 24
135h 1920 x 1440 x 8
136h 1920 x 1440 x 15
137h 1920 x 1440 x 16
138h 1920 x 1440 x 24
Table 189: Setting options - VESA mode

Software B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center
8. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center
The ADI (Automation Device Interface) enables access to specific functions of B&R devices.
Settings for this device can be read and edited using the B&R Control Center applet in the control
panel.
Chapter 4
Figure 328: ADI Control Center screenshots - Examples (symbol photo) Software
Information:
The displayed temperature and voltage values (e.g. CPU temperature, core voltage,
battery voltage) on the corresponding ADI page represent uncalibrated information
values. These cannot be used to draw any conclusions about any hardware alarms
or error conditions. The hardware components used have automatic diagnostics
functions that can be applied in the event of error.

8.1 Functions
Information:
The functions provided by the Automation Device Interface (ADI) - Control Center
vary according to device series.
Adjusting the display-specific parameters of connected Panels

Reading of device-specific keys
Activation of device specific LEDs on a foil keypad
Reading temperatures, fan speeds, statistical data, and switch settings
Reading user settings and factory settings
Reading software versions
Updating and securing firmware
Creating reports about the current system (support assistance)
Setting the SDL equalizer value for the SDL cable adjustment
Configuring an optional mounted UPS
Change the user serial ID.
Supports following systems:
Automation PC 620
Automation PC 810
Automation PC 820
Panel PC 300
Panel PC 700
Panel PC 725
Panel PC 800
Power Panel 300/400 BIOS Gerte
Power Panel 500
Mobile Panel BIOS Gerte
Automation Panel 800 (in connection with Automation PCs and Panel PCs)
Automation Panel 900 (in connection with Automation PCs and Panel PCs)

8.2 Installation
A detailed description of the Control Center can be found in the integrated online help. The B&R
Automation Device Interface (ADI) driver (also contains Control Center) can be downloaded for
free from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).
1. Download and unzip the ZIP archive
2. Close all applications
3. Run BrSetup.exe (e.g. double-click on it in Explorer).
- or -
1. Right click on BrSetup.inf in explorer and select "Install".
Information:
The ADI driver is already included in the B&R images of embedded operating
systems.
If a more current ADI driver version exists (see the B&R homepage download area),
it can be installed later. A potentially activated "Enhanced Write Filter (EWF)" must
be taken into consideration when installing.
Chapter 4
Software


Standards and certifications Applicable European directives
Chapter 5 Standards and certifications
1. Applicable European directives
EMC directive 2004/108/EC

Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC
Machine directives 98/37/EC beginning 12/29/2009: 2006/42/EC
2. Overview of standards
Standard Description
EN 55011 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), radio disturbance product standard, industrial, scientific, and
Class A medical high-frequency devices (ISM devices), limit values and measurement procedure; group 1
(devices that do not create HF during material processing) and group 2 (devices that create HF during
material processing)
EN 55022 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), radio disturbance characteristics, information technology
Class A equipment (ITE devices), limits and methods of measurement
EN 60060-2 High-voltage test techniques - part 2: Measuring systems
EN 60068-2-1 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test A: Cold
EN 60068-2-2 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test B: Dry heat
EN 60068-2-3 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test and guidance: Damp heat, constant
EN 60068-2-6 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test: Vibration (sinusoidal)
EN 60068-2-14 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test N: Change of temperature
EN 60068-2-27 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test and guidance: Shock
EN 60068-2-30 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test and guidance: Damp heat, cyclic
Standards and
certifications
Chapter 5
EN 60068-2-31 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test: Drop and topple, primarily for equipment-type specimens
EN 60068-2-32 Environmental testing - part 2: Tests; test: Free fall
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery, electrical equipment on machines - part 1: General requirements
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-2: Testing and measuring techniques; electrostatic
discharge immunity test
EN 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-3: Testing and measuring techniques; radiated radio-
frequency electromagnetic field immunity test
EN 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-4: Testing and measuring techniques; electrical fast
transient/burst immunity test
Table 190: Overview of standards

Standards and certifications Overview of standards
Standard Description
EN 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-5: Testing and measuring techniques; surge immunity
test
EN 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-6: Testing and measuring techniques; immunity to
conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
EN 61000-4-8 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-8: Testing and measuring techniques; power frequency
magnetic field immunity test
EN 61000-4-11 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-11: Testing and measuring techniques; voltage dips,
short interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests
EN 61000-4-12 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - part 4-12: Testing and measuring techniques; oscillatory waves
immunity test
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), generic immunity standard - part 2: Industrial environment
EN 61000-6-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), generic emission standard - part 2: Industrial environment
EN 61131-2 Product standard, programmable logic controllers - part 2: Equipment requirements and tests
IEC 61131-2
NEMA 250 Type 4X UL protection against sprayed water
UL 508 Industrial control equipment (UL = Underwriters Laboratories)
47 CFR Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Table 190: Overview of standards (Forts.)

Standards and certifications Emission requirements
3. Emission requirements
Emissions Test carried out according to Limits according to

Network-related emissions EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4: Generic standard (industrial areas)
EN 55011: Industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) radio-frequency
equipment, class A (industrial areas)
EN 55022: Information technology equipment (ITE devices), class A
(industrial areas)
EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A (FCC)
Emissions, EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4: Generic standard (industrial areas)
Electromagnetic emissions
EN 55011: Industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) radio-frequency
equipment, class A (industrial areas)
EN 55022: Information technology equipment (ITE devices), class A
(industrial areas)
47 CFR Part 15 Subpart B Class A (FCC)
Table 191: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for emissions
3.1 Network-related emissions
Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4 EN 55011 Class A EN 55022 Class A
Power mains connections 79 dB (V) 79 dB (V) 79 dB (V)
150 kHz - 500 kHz Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
66 dB (V) 66 dB (V) 66 dB (V)
Average Average Average
Power mains connections 73 dB (V) 73 dB (V) 73 dB (V)
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
60 dB (V) 60 dB (V) 60 dB (V)
Average Average Average
Other connections 97 - 87 dB (V) und
150 kHz - 500 kHz 53 - 43 dB (A)
Standards and
Quasi-peak value
certifications
- -
Chapter 5
84 - 74 dB (V) und
40 - 30 dB (A)
Average
Other connections 87 dB (V) and 43 dB (A)
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value
- -
74 dB (V) and 30 dB (A)
Average
Table 192: Test requirements - Network-related emissions for industrial areas

Standards and certifications Emission requirements
Test carried out according to Limit value in accordance with Limits according to 47 CFR Part
EN 55011 / EN 55022 IEC 61131-2 15 Subpart B class A
Power mains connections 1) 79 dB (V) 79 dB (V)
150 kHz - 500 kHz Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
66 dB (V) 66 dB (V)
Average Average
Power mains connections 73 dB (V) 73 dB (V)
500 kHz - 30 MHz Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
60 dB (V) 60 dB (V)
Average Average
Other connections
-
150 kHz - 500 kHz
Other connections
-
500 kHz - 30 MHz
Table 192: Test requirements - Network-related emissions for industrial areas (Forts.)
1) AC network connections only with EN 61131-2
3.2 Emissions, electromagnetic emissions
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61000-6-4 EN 55011 Class A EN 55022 Class A
30 MHz - 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m) < 40 dB (V/m) < 40 dB (V/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
230 MHz - 1 GHz < 47 dB (V/m) < 47 dB (V/m) < 47 dB (V/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value Quasi-peak value
Test carried out according to Limits according to
EN 55011 / EN 55022 EN 61131-2
30 MHz - 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m)
measured at a distance of 10 m Quasi-peak value
230 MHz - 1 GHz < 47 dB (V/m)
Test carried out Limits according to 47 CFR Part
15 Subpart B class A
30 MHz - 88 MHz < 90 dB (V/m)
88 MHz - 216 MHz < 150 dB (V/m)
216 MHz - 960 MHz < 210 dB (V/m)
> 960 MHz < 300 dB (V/m)
Table 193: Test requirements - Electromagnetic emissions for industrial areas

Standards and certifications Requirements for immunity to disturbances
4. Requirements for immunity to disturbances
Immunity Test carried out according to Limits according to

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
Immunity against high-frequency EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
electromagnetic
fields (HF field) EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity to high-speed transient EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)

electrical disturbances (burst)
Immunity to surge voltages EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
Immunity to conducted EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
disturbances
Immunity against magnetic fields EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
with electrical frequencies
Immunity to voltage dips, short- EN 61000-4-11 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)
term interruptions and voltage
fluctuations EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Immunity to damped vibration EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-6-2: Generic standard (industrial areas)

Table 194: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for immunity
Evaluation criteria in accordance with EN 61000-6-2
Criteria A:
The operating equipment must continue to work as intended during the test. There should be
no interference in the operating behavior and no system failures below a minimum operating
quality as defined by the manufacturer.
Criteria B:
The operating equipment must continue to work as directed after the test. There should be no
Standards and
certifications
interference in the operating behavior and no system failures below a minimum operating quality
Chapter 5
as defined by the manufacturer.
Criteria C:
A temporary function failure is permitted if the function restores itself, or the function can be
restored by activating configuration and control elements.
Criteria D:
Impairment or failure of the function, which can no longer be established (operating equipment
destroyed).

4.1 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to

EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
Contact discharge to powder- 4 kV, 10 discharges, 4 kV, 10 discharges,
coated and bare metal housing criteria B criteria B
parts
Discharge through the air to plastic 8 kV, 10 discharges, 8 kV, 10 discharges,
housing parts criteria B criteria B
Table 195: Test requirements - Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
4.2 High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field)

EN 61000-4-3 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
Housing, completely wired 80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m, 80% 2 GHz - 2.7 GHz, 1 V/m,
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, 1.4 GHz - 2 GHz, 3 V/m,
length 3 seconds, criteria A 80 MHz - 1 GHz, 10 V/m,
80% amplitude modulation with
1kHz, 3 sec. duration,
criteria A
Table 196: Test requirements - High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field)

4.3 High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst)

EN 61000-4-4 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC mains inputs/outputs 2 kV, criteria B -
AC power inputs - 2 kV, criteria B
AC power outputs - 1 kV, criteria B
1)
DC power I/O > 10 m 2 kV, criteria B -
DC power inputs >10 m - 2 kV, criteria B
DC power outputs >10 m - 1 kV, criteria B
Functional ground connections,
1 kV, criteria B 1 kV, criteria B
signal lines and I/Os >3 m
Unshielded AC I/O >3 m - 2 kV, criteria B
Analog I/O 1 kV, criteria B 1 kV, criteria B
Table 197: Test requirements - High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst)
1) For EN 55024 without length limitation.
4.4 Surges

EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC power I/O, L to L 1 kV, criteria B 1 kV, criteria B
AC power I/O, L to PE 2 kV, criteria B 2 kV, criteria B
DC power I/O, L+ to L-, >10 m 0.5 kV, criteria B -
DC power I/O, L to PE, >10 m 0.5 kV, criteria B -
DC power inputs, L+ to L- - 0.5 kV, criteria B
DC power inputs, L to PE - 1 kV, criteria B
DC power outputs, L+ to L- - 0.5 kV, criteria B
DC power outputs, L to PE - 0.5 kV, criteria B
Standards and
Signal connections >30 m 1 kV, criteria B 1 kV, criteria B
certifications
Chapter 5
All shielded cables - 1 kV, criteria B
Table 198: Test requirements - Surge voltages
4.5 Conducted disturbances

EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC mains inputs/outputs 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
amplitude modulation with 1 kHz, amplitude modulation with 1 kHz,
length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A
Table 199: Test requirements - Conducted disturbances


EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
DC mains inputs/outputs 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A
Functional ground connections 0.15 - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
Length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A
Signal connections >3 m 0.15 - 80 MHz, 10 V, 80% 150 kHz - 80 MHz, 3 V, 80%
Length 3 seconds, criteria A length 3 seconds, criteria A
Table 199: Test requirements - Conducted disturbances (Forts.)
4.6 Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies

EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
Test direction x, test in the field of
30 A/m, criteria A 30 A/m, criteria A
an induction coil 1 m x 1 m
Test direction y, test in the field of
Test direction z, test in the field of
Table 200: Test requirements - Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies
4.7 Voltage dips, fluctuations, and short-term interruptions

EN 61000-4-11 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61131-2
AC power inputs Voltage dip
70% (30% reduction), 0.5 periods, -
criteria B
40% (60% reduction), 5 periods, -
criteria C
40% (60% reduction), 50 periods, -
criteria C
AC power inputs Voltage interruptions
< 5% (> 95% reduction), 250 -
periods, criteria C
AC power inputs 20 interruptions, 0.5 periods,
-
criteria A
DC power inputs 20 interruptions for 10 ms < UN -
-
15%, criteria A
Table 201: Test requirements - Voltage dips, fluctuations, and short-term interruptions

4.8 Damped vibration

EN 61000-4-12 EN 61131-2
Mains inputs/outputs, L to L 1 kV, 1 MHz, repeat rate
400/seconds, length 2 seconds,
connection lengths 2 m, criteria B
Power I/O, L to PE 2.5 kV, 1 MHz, repeat rate
400/seconds, length 2 seconds,
connection lengths 2 m, criteria B
Table 202: Test requirements - Damped vibration
Standards and
certifications
Chapter 5

Standards and certifications Mechanical conditions
5. Mechanical conditions
Vibration Test carried out according to Limits according to

Vibration operation EN 60068-2-6 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Vibration during transport EN 60068-2-6 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1
(packaged)
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Shock during operation EN 60068-2-27 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Shock during transport (packaged) EN 60068-2-27 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Toppling (packaged) EN 60068-2-31 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Free fall (packaged) EN 60068-2-32 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Table 203: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for vibration
5.1 Vibration operation

EN 60068-2-6 EN 61131-2 EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Vibration during operation: 10 sweeps for each axis 10 sweeps for each axis
Uninterrupted duty with moveable
frequency in all 3 axes (x, y, z), 1 Frequency Limit value Frequency Limit value
octave per minute 5 - 9 Hz Amplitude 2 - 9 Hz Amplitude
3.5 mm 3 mm
9 - 150 Hz Acceleration 9 - 200 Hz Acceleration
1g 1g
Table 204: Test requirements - Vibration during operation

5.2 Vibration during transport (packaged)
EN 60068-2-6 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Vibration during transport: 10 sweeps for each axis, 10 sweeps for each axis, 10 sweeps for each axis,
Uninterrupted duty with moveable packaged packaged packaged
frequency in all 3 axes (x, y, z)
Frequency Limit value Frequency Limit value Frequency Limit value
2 - 9 Hz Amplitude 2 - 9 Hz Amplitude 2 - 8 Hz Amplitude
3.5 mm 3.5 mm 7.5 mm
9 - 200 Hz Acceleration 9 - 200 Hz Acceleration 8 - 200 Hz Acceleration
1g 1g 2g
200 - 500 Hz Acceleration 200 - 500 Hz Acceleration 200 - 500 Hz Acceleration
1.5 g 1.5 g 4g
Table 205: Test requirements - Vibration during transport (packaged)
5.3 Shock during operation

EN 60068-2-27 EN 61131-2 EN 60721-3-3 class 3M4
Shock during operation: Pulse Acceleration 15 g, Acceleration 15 g,
(half-sine) stress in all 3 axes (x, y, length 11 ms, 18 shocks Duration 11 ms
z)
Table 206: Test requirements - Shock during operation
5.4 Shock during transport (packaged)

EN 60068-2-27 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
Pulse (half-sine) stress in all 3 axes Acceleration 10 g, Acceleration 30 g,
(x, y, z) Duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks, Duration 6 ms, each 3 shocks,
packaged packaged
Table 207: Test requirements - Shock during transport Standards and
5.5 Toppling
certifications
Chapter 5
EN 60068-2-31 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M1 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2 EN 60721-3-2 class 2M3
Drop and topple Devices: Drop/topple Devices: Drop/topple Devices: Drop/topple
on each edge on each edge on each edge
Weight Required Weight Required Weight Required
< 20 kg Yes < 20 kg Yes < 20 kg Yes
20 - 100 kg - 20 - 100 kg Yes 20 - 100 kg Yes
> 100 kg - > 100 kg - > 100 kg Yes
Table 208: Test requirements - Toppling

5.6 Free fall (packaged)
Test carried out according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to Limits according to
EN 60068-2-32 EN 61131-2 EN 60721-3-2 class EN 60721-3-2 class EN 60721-3-2 class
2M1 2M2 2M3
Free fall Devices with delivery Devices packaged Devices packaged Devices packaged
packaging each with 5
fall tests
Weight Height Weight Height Weight Height Weight Height
< 10 kg 1.0 m < 20 kg 0.25 m < 20 kg 1.2 m < 20 kg 1.5 m
10 - 40 kg 0.5 m 20 - 100 0.25 m 20 - 100 1.0 m 20 - 100 1.2 m
kg kg kg
> 40 kg 0.25 m > 100 kg 0.1 m > 100 kg 0.25 m > 100 kg 0.5 m
Devices with product
packaging each with 5
fall tests
Weight Height
< 10 kg 0.3 m
10 - 40 kg 0.3 m
> 40 kg 0.25 m
Table 209: Test requirements - Toppling

Standards and certifications Climate conditions
6. Climate conditions
Temperature / humidity Test carried out according to Limits according to

Worst case operation UL 508 UL 508: Industrial control equipment
Dry heat EN 60068-2-2 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Dry cold EN 60068-2-1 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Large temperature fluctuations EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Temperature fluctuations in EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
operation
Humid heat, cyclic EN 60068-2-30 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Humid heat, constant (storage) EN 60068-2-3 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
Sprayed water (from front) NEMA 250 Type 4X UL 50 - NEMA 250 4X: Degree of protection provided by housing
Table 210: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for temperature and humidity
6.1 Worst case operation
Test carried out Limits according to Limits according to

according to UL 508 UL 508 EN 61131-2
Worst case during operation. 3 hours at max. ambient 3 hours at max. ambient
Operation of the device with the temperature (min. +40C) temperature (min. +40C)
max. ambient temperature duration approx. 5 hours duration approx. 5 hours
specified in the data sheet at the
max. specified load
Table 211: Test requirements - Worst case during operation
6.2 Dry heat

EN 60068-2-2 EN 61131-2
Dry heat 16 hours at +70C for 1 cycle,
then 1 hour acclimatization and
Standards and
function testing, duration
certifications
Chapter 5
approximately 17 hours
Table 212: Test requirements - Dry heat
6.3 Dry cold

EN 60068-2-1 EN 61131-2
Dry cold 16 hours at -40C for 1 cycle, then
1 hour acclimatization and
function testing, duration
Table 213: Test requirements - Dry cold

6.4 Large temperature fluctuations

EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2
Large temperature fluctuations 3 hours at -40C and 3 hours at
+70C, 5 cycles, then 2 hours
acclimatization and function
testing, duration approximately
14 hours
Table 214: Test requirements - Large temperature fluctuations
6.5 Temperature fluctuations in operation

EN 60068-2-14 EN 61131-2
Open devices: These can also 3 hours at +5C and 3 hours at
have a housing and are installed in +55C, 2 cycles, temperature
control cabinets gradient 3C / min, the unit is
occasionally supplied with voltage
during testing, duration
Closed devices: These are devices 3 hours at +5C and
whose data sheet specifies a 3 hours at +55C, 5 cycles,
surrounding housing (enclosure) temperature gradient 3C / min,
with the corresponding safety the unit is occasionally supplied
precautions with voltage during testing,
duration approximately 30 hours
Table 215: Test requirements - Temperature fluctuations during operation
6.6 Humid heat, cyclic

EN 60068-2-30 EN 61131-2
Alternating climate 24 hours at +25C / +55C and
97% / 83% RH, 2 cycles, then
2 hours acclimatization, function
testing and insulation, duration
Table 216: Test requirements - Humid heat, cyclic
6.7 Humid heat, constant (storage)

EN 60068-2-3 EN 61131-2
Humid heat, constant (storage) 48 hours at +40C and 92.5% RH,
then insulation test within 3 hours,
duration approximately 49 hours
Table 217: Test requirements - Humid heat, constant (storage)

6.8 Sprayed water (front side)

UL 50 Nema 250 type 4X
Sprayed water (front side) Spraying using a 25.4 mm
(diameter) water jet nozzle
Distance: 3 to 3.7 meters (all
angles)
Water flow: 246 liters/minute
Duration: 48 seconds, 5 seconds
minimum
Table 218: Test requirements - Sprayed water (front side)
Standards and
certifications
Chapter 5

Standards and certifications Safety
7. Safety
Safety Test carried out according to Limits according to

Ground resistance EN 61131-2 EN 60204-1: Electrical equipment of machines
Insulation resistance EN 60204-1: Electrical equipment of machines
High voltage EN 60060-1 EN 61131-2: Programmable logic controllers
UL 508: Industrial control equipment
Table 219: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for safety
7.1 Ground resistance

EN 61131-2 EN 60204-11) EN 61131-2
Ground resistance: housing (from Smallest effective cross section of Maximum measured voltage drop Test current 30 A for 2 min,
any metal part to the ground the protective ground conductor at a test current of 10 A < 0.1
terminal) for the branch being tested
1.0 mm 3.3 V
1.5 mm 2.6 V
2.5 mm 1.9 V
4.0 mm 1.4 V
> 6.0 mm 1.0 V
Table 220: Test requirements - Ground resistance
1) See EN 60204-1:1997 page 62, table 9.
7.2 Insulation resistance
Test carried out Limits according to

EN 60204-11)
Insulation resistance: main circuits > 1 M at 500 V DC voltage
to protective ground conductor
Table 221: Test requirements - Insulation resistance
1) See EN 60204-1:1997 page 62, table 9.

Standards and certifications Safety
7.3 High voltage

EN 60060-1 EN 61131-21) UL 508
High voltage: Primary circuit to Input voltage Test voltage Input Test voltage
secondary circuit and to protective voltage
ground circuit (transformers, coils, 1.2/50 s AC, 1 min DC, 1 min AC, 1 min DC, 1 min
varistors, capacitors and voltage
components used to protect surge peak
against overvoltage can be 0 - 50 VAC
removed before the test) 850 V 510 V 720 V 50 V 500 V 707 V
0 - 60 VDC
(1000 V +
50 - 100 VAC 1000 V +
1360 V 740 V 1050 V > 50 V 2 x UN)
60 - 100 VDC 2 x UN
x 1.414
100 - 150 VAC
2550 V 1400 V 1950 V
100 - 150 VDC
150 - 300 VAC
4250 V 2300 V 3250 V
150 - 300 VDC
300 - 600 VAC
6800 V 3700 V 5250 V
300 - 600 VDC
600 - 1000 VAC
10200 V 5550 V 7850 V
600 - 1000 VDC
Table 222: Test requirements - High voltage
1) See EN 61131-2:2003 page 104, table 59.
7.4 Voltage range

EN 61131-2
Supply voltage Measurement Tolerance
value min/max
24 VDC
-15%
48 VDC
+20%
125 VDC
24 VAC
Standards and
certifications
48 VAC
Chapter 5
100 VAC
110 VAC
15%
120 VAC
+10%
200 VAC
230 VAC
240 VAC
400 VAC
Table 223: Test requirements - Voltage range

Standards and certifications Other tests
8. Other tests
Other tests Test carried out according to Limits according to

Function test - -
Optical test - -
Hot spot measurement - -
Protection - EN 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
Mounting dimensions - B&R
Table 224: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for other tests
8.1 Protection

EN 60529 EN 60529
Protection of the operating IP2. IP.6
equipment Protection against large solid Protection against large solid
foreign bodies =12.5 mm diameter foreign bodies:
Dust-proof
Protection of personnel IP2. IP.6
Protection against touching Protection against touching
dangerous parts with finger dangerous parts with conductor
Protection against water IP.0 IP.5
permeation with damaging Not protected Protected against sprayed water
consequences
Table 225: Test requirements - Protection

Standards and certifications International certifications
9. International certifications
B&R products and services comply with applicable standards. They are international standards
from organizations such as ISO, IEC and CENELEC, as well as national standards from
organizations such as UL, CSA, FCC, VDE, VE, etc. We give special consideration to the
reliability of our products in an industrial environment.
Certifications
USA and Canada All important B&R products are tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories and
checked quarterly by a UL inspector.
This mark is valid for the USA and Canada and simplifies certification of your machines
and systems in these areas.
Europe All harmonized EN standards for the applicable directives are met.
Table 226: International certifications
Standards and
certifications
Chapter 5

Standards and certifications International certifications

Accessories Overview
Chapter 6 Accessories
1. Overview
Model number Product ID Note

0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs.
Lithium batteries, 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 pc.
Lithium battery, 1 pc., 3 V / 950 mAh, button cell
0TB103.9 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin screw clamp
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Screw clamps, 3.31 mm, protected against vibration by the
screw flange
0TB103.91 Plug 24V 5.08 3-pin cage clamp
24 VDC 3-pin connector, female. Cage clamps, 3.31 mm, protected against vibration by the
screw flange
5AC900.057X-00 Legend strips 3x 5.7" vertical1
5AC900.057X-01 Legend strips 2x 5.7" Horizontal2
5AC900.104X-00 Legend strip 1x 10.4" Vertical1
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP451.1043-75 and 4PP481.1043-B5. For 1 device.
5AC900.104X-01 Legend strip 1x 10.4" Horizontal2
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP482.1043-75. For 1 device.
5AC900.150X-00 Legend strips 4x 15"
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP481.1505-75, 4PP480.1505-75. For 4 devices.
5CFCRD.0512-04 CompactFlash 512 MB B&R
Accessories
Chapter 6
5CFCRD.016G-04 CompactFlash 16 GB B&R

CompactFlash card with 16 GB SLC NAND flash and IDE/ATA interface
5CFCRD.0064-03 CompactFlash 64 MB SSI
Table 227: Model numbers - Accessories

Accessories Overview
Model number Product ID Note

5MMUSB.2048-00 USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk
5MMUSB.2048-01 USB flash drive 2 GB B&R

9A0017.01 RS232 DB9 null modem cable 0.6 m
socket)
socket)
5SWHMI.0000-00 HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD
Table 227: Model numbers - Accessories

Accessories Replacement CMOS batteries
2. Replacement CMOS batteries
The lithium battery is needed for buffering the BIOS CMOS data, the real-time clock, and SRAM
data.
The battery is subject to wear and must be replaced when the battery power (status "Bad") is
insufficient (see "Changing the battery", on page 550).
2.1 Order data
Model number Description Image

0AC201.91 Lithium batteries, 4 pcs., 3 V / 950 mAh button cell
4A0006.00-000 Lithium battery, 1 piece, 3 V / 950 mAh button cell
Table 228: Order data - Lithium batteries
2.2 Technical data
Information:
The following characteristics, features and limit values only apply to this accessory
and can deviate those specified for the entire device. For the entire device where
this accessory is installed, refer to the data provided specifically for the entire
device.
The technical data is current as of when this manual was printed. We reserve the
right to make changes.
Features 0AC201.91 4A0006.00-000

Capacity 950 mAh
Voltage 3V
Self discharge at +23C < 1% per year
Storage time Max. 3 years at 30 C
Storage temperature -20 to +60C
Relative humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Accessories
Chapter 6
Table 229: Technical data - Lithium batteries

Accessories Replacement CMOS batteries
2.3 Contents of delivery
Amount Component
1 or 4 Lithium batteries
Table 230: Contents of delivery - Lithium batteries

Accessories TB103 3-pin supply voltage connector
3. TB103 3-pin supply voltage connector
This single row 3-pin terminal block is mainly used to connect the supply voltage.
3.2 Order data

0TB103.9 Plug for the 24 V supply voltage (screw clamps)
0TB103.91 Plug for the 24 V supply voltage (cage clamps)
0TB103.9
0TB103.91
Table 231: Order data - TB103 supply plug
Accessories
Chapter 6

Accessories TB103 3-pin supply voltage connector
3.3 Technical data
Information:
device.
Name 0TB103.9 0TB103.91

Number of pins 3
Type of terminal Screw clamps Cage clamps
Distance between contacts 5.08 mm
Resistance between contacts 5 m
Nominal voltage according to VDE / 250 V / 300 V
UL,CSA
Current load according to VDE / UL,CSA 14.5 A / 10 A per contact
Terminal size 0.08 mm - 3.31 mm
Cable type Copper wires only (no aluminum wires!)
Table 232: Technical data - TB103 supply plug
3.4 Contents of delivery
Amount Component
1 Supply plug in desired design.
Table 233: Contents of delivery - TB103 supply plug

Accessories Legend strip templates
4. Legend strip templates
Power Panel devices with keys are delivered with partially pre-labeled key legend strips (F1, F2,
etc.). The key legend strip slots are accessible on the back of the Power Panel device (above
and below).
Figure 329: Legend strip templates
Printable legend strips (A4 format) can be ordered from B&R (see table 234 "Order data - Legend
strip templates", on page 526). They can be printed using a standard laser printer (b/w or color)
in a temperature range from -40 to +125C. A print template (available for Corel Draw version 7,
9 and 10) for the respective legend strip template can be downloaded from the B&R homepage
Accessories
Chapter 6

Accessories Legend strip templates
4.1 Order data

5AC900.057X-00 Legend strips 3x 5.7" vertical1 Examples of legend strip templates
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP451.0571-65. For 3
devices.
devices.
5AC900.104X-00 Legend strip 1x 10.4" Vertical1
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP451.1043-75 and
4PP481.1043-B5. For 1 device.
5AC900.104X-01 Legend strip 1x 10.4" Horizontal2
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP482.1043-75. For 1 NEL EINSCHUBSTREIFENVORDRUCK PASSEND FR
NEL KEY TEMPLATE FOR
5-75, 4PP481.1505-75
Identnummer: C0030776
Format: A4
device.
devices.
5AC900.150X-00 Legend strips 4x 15"
Legend strip template for Power Panel 4PP481.1505-75,
4PP480.1505-75. For 4 devices.
NEL EINSCHUBSTREIFENVORDRUCK PASSEND FR Identnummer: C0030768

NEL KEY TEMPLATE FOR Format: A4
1-65
Table 234: Order data - Legend strip templates

Accessories CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04
5. CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04
Information:
The 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 CompactFlash cards are supported on B&R devices with
WinCE Version 6.0 or higher.
5.2 Order data

5CFCRD.0512-04 512 MB B&R CompactFlash card
5CFCRD.016G-04 16 GB B&R CompactFlash card
CompactFlash card
Table 235: Order data - CompactFlash cards
Accessories
Chapter 6

5.3 Technical data
Caution!
A sudden loss of power can cause data to be lost! In very rare cases, the mass
memory may also become damaged.
To prevent damage and loss of data, it is recommended to use a UPS device.
Information:
device.
Features 5CFCRD.0512- 5CFCRD.1024- 5CFCRD.2048- 5CFCRD.4096- 5CFCRD.8192- 5CFCRD.016G

04 04 04 04 04 -04
MTBF (at 25C) > 3,000,000 hours
Maintenance None
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1014 bit read accesses
Data retention 10 years
Lifetime monitoring Yes
Supported operating modes PIO Mode 0-6, Multiword DMA Mode 0-4, Ultra DMA Mode 0-4
Continuous reading Typically 35 Typically 35 Typically 35 Typically 33 Typically 27 Typically 36
MB/s (240X)1) 2) MB/s (240X)1) MB/s (240X)1) MB/s (220X)1) MB/s (180X)1) MB/s (240X)1)
Max. 37 MB/s 2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
(260X)1) 2) Max. 37 MB/s Max. 37 MB/s Max. 34 MB/s Max. 28 MB/s Max. 37 MB/s
(260X)1) 2) (260X)1) 2) (226X)1) 2) (186X)1) 2) (247X)1) 2)
Continuous writing Typically 17 Typically 17 Typically 17 Typically 16 Typically 15 Typically 18
MB/s (110X) MB/s (110X) MB/s (110X) MB/s (106X) MB/s (100X) MB/s (120X)
Max. 20 MB/s Max. 20 MB/s Max. 20 MB/s Max. 18 MB/s Max. 17 MB/s Max. 19 MB/s
(133X) (133X) (133X) (120X) (110X) (126X)
Endurance
Guaranteed amount of data 3) 50 TB 100 TB 200 TB 400 TB 800 TB 1600 TB
Results in 5 years 3) 27.40 GB/day 54.79 GB/day 109.59 GB/day 219.18 GB/day 438.36 GB/day 876.72 GB/day
Clear/write cycles
Guaranteed 100,000
Typical4) 2,000,000
SLC flash Yes
Wear leveling Static
Error Correction Coding (ECC) Yes
Table 236: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04

Support 5CFCRD.0512- 5CFCRD.1024- 5CFCRD.2048- 5CFCRD.4096- 5CFCRD.8192- 5CFCRD.016G

04 04 04 04 04 -04
Hardware PP300/400, PPC300, PPC700, PPC725, PPC800, APC620, APC810, APC820
Windows XP Professional - - - Yes Yes Yes
Windows XP Embedded Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows Embedded Standard
- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2009
Windows CE 6.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5)
Windows CE 5.0 - - - - - -
PVI Transfer Tool V3.2.3.8 (part of PVI Development Setup V2.06.00.3011) -
B&R Embedded OS Installer V3.10 -
Dimensions
Length 36.4 0.15 mm
Width 42.8 0.10 mm
Thickness 3.3 0.10 mm
Weight 10 g
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +70C
Storage -65 to +150C
Relative humidity
Operation/Storage/Transport Max. 85% at 85C
Vibration
Operation/Storage/Transport 20 G peak, 20- 2000 Hz, 4 in each direction (JEDEC JESD22, method B103)
5.35 G RMS, 15 min per level (IEC 68-2-6)
Shock
Operation/Storage/Transport 1.5k G peak, 0.5 ms 5 times (JEDEC JESD22, method B110)
30 G, 11 ms 1 time (IEC 68-2-27)
Altitude Max. 15,000 feet (4,572 m)
Table 236: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 (Forts.)
1) Speed specification with 1X = 150 KB/s. All specifications refer to the Samsung Flash chips, CompactFlash cards in UDMA mode 4, 30
ns cycle time in True-IDE mode with sequential write/read test.
2) The file is written/read sequentially in True IDE mode with the DOS program Thruput.exe.
3) Endurance of B&R CF cards (linear written block size with 128 kB)
4) Depending on the average file size.
5) Not supported by B&R Embedded OS installer.
Accessories
Chapter 6

5.3.1 Temperature humidity diagram - Operation and storage
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Storage
50 Operation
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 330: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04
5.4 Dimensions
1.60 0.05
0.99 0.05
26 50
1 25
1.01 0.07 1.01 0.07
3.30 0.1
2x 12 0.10
2x 3 0.07
CompactFlash type I
2x 25.78 0.07
2.44 0.07
36.4 0.15
Top
0.76 0.7
1.65 0.63 0.07

41.66 0.13
4 x R0.5 0.1
42.8 0.1
Figure 331: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I

5.5 Benchmark
40
35
30
25
Transferrate [MB/s]
20
15
10
0,5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Transfergre [kb]
5CFCRD.0512-04 5CFCRD.4096-04 5CFCRD.016G-04

5CFCRD.0512-03 5CFCRD.4096-03
Figure 332: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (reading)
40
35
30
25
Transferrate [MB/s]
20
15
10
5
Accessories
Chapter 6
0,5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192

Transfergre [kb]
5CFCRD.0512-04 5CFCRD.4096-04 5CFCRD.016G-04
5CFCRD.0512-03 5CFCRD.4096-03
Figure 333: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (writing)

Accessories CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03
6. CompactFlash cards - 5CFCRD.xxxx-03
Information:
On Windows CE 5.0 devices, 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 CompactFlash cards up to 1GB are
supported.
6.2 Order data

CompactFlash card
Table 237: Order data - CompactFlash cards

6.3 Technical data
Caution!
A sudden loss of power can cause data to be lost! In very rare cases, the mass
memory may also become damaged.
To prevent damage and loss of data, B&R recommends that you use a UPS device.
Information:
device.
Features 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD.

0064-03 0128-03 0256-03 0512-03 1024-03 2048-03 4096-03 8192-03
MTBF (at +25C) > 4,000,000 hours
Maintenance None
Data reliability < 1 unrecoverable error in 1014 bit read accesses
Lifetime monitoring Yes
Supported operating modes PIO Mode 0-4, Multiword DMA Mode 0-2
Continuous reading Typically 8 MB/s
Continuous writing Typically 6 MB/s
Endurance
Clear/write cycles
Typical > 2,000,000
SLC flash Yes
Wear leveling Static
Error Correction Coding (ECC) Yes
Support
Hardware MP100/200, PP100/200, PP300/400, PPC700, PPC300,
Provit 2000, Provit 5000, APC620, APC680, APC810, APC820
Windows XP Professional - - - - - - Yes Yes
Windows XP Embedded - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Windows CE 6.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes1)
Accessories
Chapter 6
Windows CE 5.0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - -
Table 238: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

Support 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD. 5CFCRD.

0064-03 0128-03 0256-03 0512-03 1024-03 2048-03 4096-03 8192-03
PVI Transfer Tool V2.57 (part of PVI Development Setup V2.5.3.3005)
B&R Embedded OS Installer V2.21
Dimensions
Length 36.4 0.15 mm
Width 42.8 0.10 mm
Thickness 3.3 0.10 mm
Weight 11.4 g
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +70C
Relative humidity
Operation/Storage/Transport 8 to 95%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation Max. 16.3 g (159 m/s2 0-peak)
Storage/Transport Max. 30 g (294 m/s2 0-peak)
Shock
Operation Max. 1000 g (9810 m/s2 0-peak)
Storage/Transport Max. 3000 g (29430 m/s2 0-peak)
Altitude Maximum 80,000 feet (24,383 meters)
Table 238: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 (Forts.)
1) Not supported by B&R Embedded OS installer.
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55 Storage
50 Operation
Transport
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 334: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03

6.4 Dimensions
1.60 0.05
0.99 0.05
26 50
1 25
1.01 0.07 1.01 0.07
3.30 0.1
2x 12 0.10
2x 3 0.07
CompactFlash type I
2x 25.78 0.07
2.44 0.07
36.4 0.15
Top
0.76 0.7
1.65 0.63 0.07
41.66 0.13
4 x R0.5 0.1
42.8 0.1
Figure 335: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I
Accessories
Chapter 6

Accessories USB flash drive
7. USB flash drive
Information:
We reserve the right to supply alternative products due to the vast quantity of flash
drives available on the market and their corresponding short product lifecycle.
Therefore, the following measures might be necessary in order to boot from these
flash drives (e.g. the SanDisk Cruzer Micro flash drive with 2 GB):
The flash drive must be reformatted or in some cases even re-partitioned (set
active partition).
The flash drive must be at the top of the BIOS boot order, or alternatively the
IDE controllers can also be deactivated in the BIOS. This can be avoided in
most cases if a "fdisk /mbr" command is also executed on the USB flash
drive.
USB flash drives are easy-to-exchange storage media. Because of the fast data transfer (USB
2.0), the USB flash drives are ideal for use as a portable memory medium. Without requiring
additional drivers ("Hot Plug & Play" - except with Windows 98SE), the USB flash drive can be
converted immediately into an additional drive where data can be read or written. Only USB flash
drives from the memory specialists SanDisk are used.
7.2 Order data

5MMUSB.2048-00 USB flash drive 2 GB SanDisk
Cruzer Micro
5MMUSB.2048-01 USB flash drive 2 GB B&R
Table 239: Order data - USB flash drives

7.3 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-00
Information:
device.
Features 5MMUSB.2048-00
LED 1 LED (green), signals data transfer (send and receive)
Power supply Via the USB port
Power consumption 650 A in sleep mode, 150 mA read/write
Interface USB specification 2.0 high speed device, mass storage class, USB-IF and WHQL certified
Type USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible
Transfer rate Up to 480 Mbit (high speed)
Sequential reading Max. 8.7 MB/second
Sequential writing Max. 1.7 MB/second
Connection To each USB type A interface
MTBF (at +25C) 100000 hours
Maintenance None
Operating system support Windows CE 5.0 and Windows XP embedded
Dimensions
Length 52.2 mm
Width 19 mm
Thickness 7.9 mm
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +45C
Storage -20 to +60C
Relative humidity
Operation 10 to 90%, non-condensing
Storage 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Transport 5 to 90%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation 2 g (10 to 500 Hz), oscillation rate 1/minute
Storage 4 g (10 to 500 Hz), oscillation rate 1/minute
Transport 4 g (10 to 500 Hz), oscillation rate 1/minute
Accessories
Chapter 6
Table 240: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-00

Environmental characteristics 5MMUSB.2048-00

Shock
Operation 40 g and 11 ms duration (all axes)
Storage 80 g and 11 ms duration (all axes)
Transport 80 g and 11 ms duration (all axes)
Altitude
Operation 3,048 meters
Storage 12,192 meters
Transport 12,192 meters
Table 240: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-00 (Forts.)
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
Storage
50 Operation
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 336: Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-00

7.4 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-01
Information:
device.
Features 5MMUSB.2048-01
LED 1 LED (green), signals data transfer (send and receive)
Power supply Via the USB port
Power consumption max. 500 A sleep mode, max. 120 mA read/write
Interface USB specification 2.0 high speed device, mass storage class, USB-IF and WHQL certified
Type USB 1.1 and 2.0 compatible
Transfer rate Up to 480 Mbit (high speed)
Sequential reading Max. 31 MB/second
Sequential writing Max. 30 MB/second
Connection To each USB type A interface
MTBF > 3,000,000 hours
Data retention > 10 years
Maintenance None
Operating system support Windows CE, ME, 2000, XP, Vista und Mac OS 9 or newer, Linux 2.4 or newer
Dimensions
Length 67.85 mm
Width 17.97 mm
Thickness 8.35 mm
Ambient temperature
Operation 0 to +70C
Relative humidity
Operation 85%, non-condensing
Storage 85%, non-condensing
Transport 85%, non-condensing
Vibration
Operation At 20 - 2000 Hz: 20 g (peak)
Storage At 20 - 2000 Hz: 20 g (peak)
Transport At 20 - 2000 Hz: 20 g (peak)
Shock
Operation max. 1500 g (peak)
Storage max. 1500 g (peak)
Accessories
Chapter 6
Transport max. 1500 g (peak)
Table 241: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01

Environmental characteristics 5MMUSB.2048-01

Altitude
Operation 3,048 meters
Storage 12,192 meters
Transport 12,192 meters
Table 241: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01 (Forts.)
100
95
90
Relative Luftfeuchtigkeit [%RH] (nicht kondensierend)
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Transport
Lagerung
50
45 Betrieb
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperatur [C] +
Figure 337: Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-01

Accessories Null modem cable 9A0017.0x
8. Null modem cable 9A0017.0x
Figure 338: Null modem cable 9A0017.0x
8.1 Order data
Model number Description Note

socket).
socket).
Table 242: Model numbers - Null modem cables
8.2 Technical data
Features 9A0017.01 9A0017.02

Length 0.6 m 10 mm 1.8 m 30 mm
Outer diameter Max. 5 mm
Shielding Entire cable
Connector type 2 9-pin DSUB sockets - female
Wire cross section AWG 22,
Flexibility Flexible
Flex radius Min. 100 mm
Table 243: Technical data - Null modem cable

Accessories
Chapter 6

Accessories Null modem cable 9A0017.0x
8.3 Cable specifications
DSUB (9-pin), male DSUB (9-pin), female
9 5 9 5
6 6
1 1
Pin assignments
DSUB (9-pin), female DSUB (9-pin), female
8 7
7 8
5 5
2 3
3 2
4 1
6 6
1 4
Shield Shield
Figure 339: Pin assignments - null modem cable

Accessories HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00
9. HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00
Figure 340: HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00

5SWHMI.0000-00 HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD
Table 244: Order data - HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD
This DVD contains drivers, utilities, software upgrades and user's manuals for B&R Panel
system products (see B&R homepage www.br-automation.com Industrial PCs, Visualization
and Operation).
At the time of its creation, the content on the DVD is identical to the files found in the download
area of the B&R homepage (under Service Material Related Downloads).
BIOS upgrades for the products
Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 CPU Board 815E und 855GME BIOS
Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 CPU Board X855GME BIOS
Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 CPU Board 945GME N270 BIOS
Automation PC 680
Automation PC 810 / Automation PC 820 / Panel PC 800 B945GME BIOS
Automation PC 810 / Panel PC 800 945GME N270 CPU Board BIOS
Automation PC 810 / Panel PC 800 GM45 CPU Board BIOS
Accessories
Chapter 6
Provit 2000 products - IPC2000/2001/2002

Provit 5000 products - IPC5000/5600/5000C/5600C
Power Panel 100 BIOS devices

Mobile Panel 100 BIOS devices

Power Panel 100 / Mobile Panel 100 User Boot Logo
Power Panel 100 / Mobile Panel 100 REMHOST Utility
Power Panel 300/400 BIOS devices
Power Panel 300/400 BIOS User Boot Logo
Panel PC 310
Drivers for the devices
Automation Device Interface (ADI)

Audio
Chipset
CD-ROM
LS120
Graphics
Network
PCI / SATA RAID controller
Touch screen
Touchpad
Interfacecard
Firmware Upgrades
Automation PC 620 / Panel PC 700 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)

Automation PC 810 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)
Automation PC 820 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)
Mobile Panel 100 (SMCX)
Panel PC 300 (MTCX)
Power Panel 100 (aPCI)
Power Panel 300/400 (aPCI)
Power Panel 300/400 (MTCX)
Panel PC 800 (MTCX, SDLR, SDLT)
UPS firmware

Utilities / Tools
B&R Embedded OS Installer

Windows CE Tools
User Boot Logo Conversion Utility
SATA RAID Installations Utility
Automation Device Interface (ADI)
CompactFlash endurance calculator (Silicon Systems)
Miscellaneous
MTC Utilities
Key Editor
MTC & Mkey Utilities
Mkey Utilities
UPS configuration software
ICU ISA configuration
Intel PCI NIC Boot ROM
Diagnostic Utilities
Windows
Windows CE 6.0
Windows CE 5.0
Windows CE 4.2
Windows CE 4.1
Windows CE Tools
Windows Embedded Standard 2009
Thin Client
Windows NT Embedded
Windows XP Embedded
VNC Viewer
MCAD templates for
Industrial PCs
Accessories
Chapter 6
Operator Interface devices

Legend Strips templates
Customized designs

ECAD templates for
Industrial PCs
Automation PCs
Automation Panel 900
Panel (Power Panel)
Documentation for
Automation PC 620
Automation PC 680
Automation PC 810
Automation PC 820
Panel PC 310
Panel PC 700
Panel PC 725
Panel PC 800
Power Panel 15/21/35/41
Power Panel 100/200
Power Panel 300/400
Mobile Panel 40/50
Mobile Panel 100/200
Mobile Panel connection box
Provit 2000
Provit 3030
Provit 4000
Provit 5000
Provit Benchmark
Provit Mkey
Windows CE 5.0 help
Windows CE 6.0 help
Windows NT Embedded application guide
Windows XP Embedded application guide
UPS - uninterruptible power supply

Implementation instructions
B&R Hilscher feldbus cards (CANopen, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, PROFINET)
Service tools
Acrobat Reader 5.0.5 (freeware in German, English and French)

Power Archiver 6.0 (freeware in German, English and French)
Internet Explorer 5.0 (German and English)
Internet Explorer 6.0 (German and English)
Accessories
Chapter 6


Maintenance / Servicing Cleaning
Maintenance / Servicing
Chapter 7
Chapter 7 Maintenance / Servicing
1. Cleaning
Danger!
Power Panel devices may only be cleaned when switched off. This is to prevent
unintended functions from being triggered when touching the touch screen or
pressing the buttons.
A moist towel should be used to clean the Power Panel device. When moistening the cloth, use
only water with detergent, screen cleaning agent, or alcohol (ethanol). The cleaning agent
should be applied to the cloth beforehand, not sprayed directly on the Power Panel device! Never
use aggressive solvents, chemicals, scouring agents, pressurized air or steam jet.
Information:
Displays with touch screens should be cleaned at regular intervals.

Maintenance / Servicing Changing the battery
2. Changing the battery
2.1 General Information
The battery guarantees buffering of the internal real-time clock (RTC), SRAM data, and
individually saved BIOS settings. For more information about the batteries for each device, see
chapter 2 "Technical data", on page 41.
Changing the battery is only necessary for devices with a lithium battery (see section "Technical
data", on page 41 for Power Panel devices).
Battery check
The battery status (good or bad) is checked every time the device is turned on, as well as every
24 hours. The check involves applying a load to the battery for a short time (approx. 1 second),
followed by an evaluation. The evaluated battery status is displayed in the BIOS Setup pages
and in the B&R Control Center (ADI driver), but can also be read in a customer application via
the ADI Library.
Battery status Meaning

OK Data buffering is guaranteed
Bad Data buffering is guaranteed for approx. another 500 hours from the point in time that the battery capacity is
determined to be BAD (insufficient).
Table 245: Meaning of battery status OK - Bad
From the point when battery capacity is recognized as insufficient, data buffering is guaranteed
for approximately another 500 hours.
Information:
The battery should only be changed by qualified personnel.
Technical data
See section 2 "Replacement CMOS batteries", on page 521.
2.2 Procedure for changing the battery
Disconnect the power supply to the Power Panel

Touch the housing or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any
electrostatic charge from your body.
Remove the battery cover: The battery cover is found on the rear side of the Power Panel
device.

Maintenance / Servicing Changing the battery
Maintenance / Servicing
0 aPCI slot Power Panel devices 1 or 2 aPCI slot Power Panel devices
Chapter 7
Table 246: Changing the battery
Carefully remove the used battery from the holder by pulling the removal strip.
Do not touch the new battery with pliers or uninsulated tweezers ->risk of short circuiting.
The battery should not be held by its edges.
Correct Incorrect
Figure 341: Battery handling
Insert the new battery with correct polarity. The correct positioning of the removal strip
must be taken into consideration.
Put on the battery cover and fasten the screws.
Reconnect the power supply to the Power Panel.
The data and time in BIOS may have to be set again (see section "Power Panel 300 with
BIOS", on page 413).
Warning!
Lithium batteries are considered hazardous waste. Used batteries should be
disposed of appropriately.

Maintenance / Servicing Preventing after-image effect in LCD/TFT monitors
3. Preventing after-image effect in LCD/TFT monitors
Burn-in effect (after images, display memory effect, image retention or also image sticking)
occurs in LCD/TFT monitors when a static image is displayed for a long period of time. This static
screen content causes the build-up of parasitic capacities within the LCD components that
prevent the liquid crystal molecules from returning to their original states. This condition may
arise, is not predictable and depends on the following factors:
Type of image displayed

Color composition of the image
Length of image output
Ambient temperature
3.1 What measures can be taken against this?
There is no total solution, however, measures can be taken to significantly reduce this effect:
Avoid static pictures or screen content

Use screen savers (moving) when the display is not in use
Frequent picture change
Shut off the display when not in use
Turning off the background lighting (backlight) does not influence the prevention of the after-
image effect.

Appendix A Touch screen
Appendix A
1. Touch screen
Appendix A
1.1 Elo Accu Touch
Information:
The following characteristics, features, and limit values only apply to this individual
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device. For the entire
device in which this individual component is used, refer to the data given
specifically for the entire device.
Elo Accu touch screen Specifications

Manufacturer Elo
Accuracy
For < 18" diagonals Typically < than 0.080 inches (2.032 mm)
Maximum error in all directions 0.180 inches (4.572 mm)
For > 18" diagonals Maximum 1% of the diagonal for the active area of the touch screens
Release pressure < 113 g
Resolution 4096 x 4096 touch points
Light permeability Up to 80% 5%
Temperature
Operation -10 to +50C
Storage -40 to +70C
Service life 35 million touch operations on the same point
Chemical resistance 1) acetone, methylene chloride, methyl ethyl ketone , isopropyl alcohol, hexane, turpentine, mineral
spirits, unleaded gasoline, diesel , motor oil, gear lubricating oil, antifreeze, normal food and drinks
Activation Finger, pointer, credit card, glove
Table 247: Technical data - Elo Accu touch screen 5-wire
1) The active area of the touch screen is resistant to these chemicals for a timeframe of one hour at +21C.

100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50 Storage
Operation
45 Transport
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 342: Temperature humidity diagram - Elo Accu touch screen
1.1.2 Cleaning
The touch screen should be cleaned with a moist lint-free cloth. When moistening the cloth, use
should be applied to the cloth beforehand and not sprayed directly onto the touch screen itself.
Never use aggressive solvents, chemicals, scouring agents, pressurized air or steam jet.

1.2 Gunze Touch
Information:
Appendix A
Manufacturer Gunze
Release pressure 10 to 80 g
Light permeability 79%
Temperature
Operation 0 to +50C
Storage -20 to +70C
Service life 1 million touch operations
Chemical resistance 1) Acetone, ammonia-based glass cleaner, normal food and drinks,
hexane, methylene chloride, methyl ethyl ketone, mineral spirits, turpentine, isopropyl alcohol
Activation Finger, pencil
Table 248: Technical data - Gunze touch screen stylus pen
1) The active area of the touch screen is resistant to these chemicals for a timeframe of one hour at +21C.

100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
Transport
55
Storage
50 Operation
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
- Temperature [C] +
Figure 343: Temperature humidity diagram - Gunze touch screen
1.2.2 Cleaning
Never use aggressive solvents, chemicals, scouring agents, pressurized air or steam jet.

1.3 Touch Screen - AMT
Information:
Appendix A
Manufacturer AMT
Release pressure <1N
Light permeability Up to 81% 3%
Temperature
Operation -20 to 70C
Bearings -40 to 80C
Transport -40 to 80C
Relative humidity
Operation Max. 90% at max. 50C
Bearings Max. 90% at max. 60C for 504 hours, non-condensing
Transport Max. 90% at max. 60C for 504 hours, non-condensing
Lifespan 36 million touch operations at the same position (release pressure: 250 g, interval: 2x per second)
Activation Finger, pointer, credit card, glove
Drivers Touch screen drivers can be downloaded from the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-
automation.com).
Table 249: Technical data - AMT Touch

100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
Storage / Transport
55
50
45 Operation
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature [C]
Figure 344: Temperature humidity diagram - AMT touch screen
Temperature data is for operation at 500 meters. Derating the max. ambient temperature -
typically 1C per 1000 meters (from 500 meters above sea level).
1.3.2 Cleaning
Never use aggressive solvents, chemicals, or scouring agents.

Appendix A Membrane
2. Membrane
The dcor foil conforms to DIN 42115 (section 2). This means it is resistant to exposure to the
following chemicals for a 24-hour period with no visible signs of damage:
Information:
component and can deviate from those specified for the entire device.
Appendix A
Ethanol Formaldehyde 37%-42% 1.1.1.Trichloroethane
Cyclohexanol Acetaldehyde Ethyl acetate
Diacetone alcohol Aliphatic hydrocarbons Diethyl ether
Glycol Toluene N-Butyl acetate
Isopropanol Xylene Amyl acetate
Glycerine White spirits Butylcellosolve
Methanol Ether
Triacetin
Dowandol
DRM/PM
Acetone Formic acid <50% Sodium hypochlorite <20%
Methyl ethyl ketone Acetic acid <50% Hydrogen peroxide <25%
Dioxan Phosphoric acid <30% Potassium carbonate
Cyclohexanone Hydrochloric acid <36% Washing agents
MIBK Nitric acid <10% Tenside
Isophorone Trichloracetic acid <50% Fabric conditioner
Sulphuric acid <10% Ferrous chloride (FeCl2)
Ferrous chloride (FeCl3)
Ammonia <40% Cutting oil Dibutyl phthalate
Caustic soda <40% Diesel oil Dioctyl phthalate
Potassium hydroxide Linseed oil Sodium carbonate
Alkali carbonate Paraffin oil
Bichromate Blown castor oil
Potassium Silicon oil
Acetonitrile Turpentine oil substitute
Sodium bisulphate Universal brake fluid
Aviation fuel
Gasoline
Water
Sea water
Decon
Table 250: Chemical resistance of the dcor foil
The dcor foil conforms to DIN 42115 section 2 for exposure to glacial acetic acid for less than
one hour without visible damage.

Appendix A Viewing angles
3. Viewing angles
The perspective information (R,L,U,D) can be seen in the technical data for the individual
components.
L U
D R
6 oclock direction
Figure 345: Viewing angles

Appendix A Mounting compatibilities
4. Mounting compatibilities
This section describes the compatibility of the installation dimensions for the Power Panel
100/200, Power Panel 300/400, Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 units according to the
respective device diagonals.
The outer dimensions of the device types are identical for the respective diagonals.
The different device types are abbreviated as follows:
Device type Abbreviation
Appendix A
Power Panel 100/200 PP100/200
Power Panel 300/400 PP300/400
Automation Panel 900 AP900
Panel PC 700 PPC700
Table 251: Product abbreviations
4.1 Compatibility overview
The following table offers a brief overview of the devices PP100/200, PP300/400, AP900 and
PPC700. Detailed information can be found in the section "Compatibility details", on page 563.
Compatibility between the device types is represented on each line by matching symbols.
Size Format Image Compatible PP100/200 PP300/400 AP900 PPC700

Outer - -
Horizontal1
dimensions
Installation - -
dimensions
Outer - -
Horizontal2
dimensions
Installation - -
5.7"
dimensions
Outer - -
dimensions
Vertical1
Installation - -
dimensions
Table 252: Device compatibility overview

Size Format Image Compatible PP100/200 PP300/400 AP900 PPC700

Outer
dimensions
Horizontal1
Installation
dimensions
Outer
Horizontal2
dimensions
Installation
10.4"
dimensions
Outer
dimensions
Vertical1
Installation
dimensions
Outer
Horizontal1
dimensions
12.1" Installation
dimensions
Outer
Horizontal1
dimensions
Installation
dimensions
15" Outer
dimensions
Vertical1
Installation
dimensions
Table 252: Device compatibility overview

4.2 Compatibility details
The measurement values (all in mm) in the following figures have the following meaning.
linker Abstand Auenma rechter Abstand

zum Gerterand zum Gerterand
10 423 x 288 10
8,5
oberer Abstand
zum Gerterand
Appendix A
Einbauma(e)
z.B. gertetypabhngig
402 x 266,5 0,5
PP100/200/300/400 402 x 271 0,5 AP900/PPC700
Differenzangabe
4,5
13 PP100/200/300/400
8,5 AP900, PPC700
Auenkontur Gert
unterer Abstand zum Gerterand
Ausschnitt PP100/200/200/300/400 Gert
z.B. gertetypabhngig
Ausschnitt AP900/PPC700 Gert
Figure 346: Compatibility details - figure structure
4.2.1 5,7" devices
6,5 212 x 156 6,5

6,5
199 x 143 0,5
PP100/200/300/400
6,5
Auenkontur Gert
Ausschnitt Gert
Figure 347: Mounting compatibility - 5.7" device format - Horizontal1
5.7" Power Panel 100/200 and Power Panel 300/400 devices in Horizontal1 format are 100%
mounting compatible.

6,5 302 x 187 6,5

6,5
289 x 174 0,5
PP100/200/300/400
6,5
Auenkontur Gert
Ausschnitt Gert
5.7" Power Panel 100/200 and Power Panel 300/400 devices in Horizontal2 format are 100%
6,5 212 x 245 6,5

6,5
199 x 226,8 0,5
PP100/200/300/400
11,7
Auenkontur Gert
Ausschnitt Gert
Figure 349: Mounting compatibility - 5.7" device format - Vertical1
5.7" Power Panel 100/200 and Power Panel 300/400 devices in Vertical1 format are 100%

4.2.2 10,4" devices
10 323 x 260 10
8,5
PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700
303 x 243 0,5
Appendix A
PP100/200/300/400 AP900
8,5
Auenkontur Gert
Ausschnitt Gert
10.4" Power Panel 100/200, Power Panel 300/400, Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700
devices in Horizontal1 format are 100% mounting compatible.
10 423 x 288 10
8,5
402 x 266,5 0,5

PP100/200/300/400 402 x 271 0,5 AP900/PPC700
4,5
13 PP100/200/300/400
8,5 AP900, PPC700
Auenkontur Gert
10.4" Power Panel 100/200 and Power Panel 300/400 are not 100% mounting compatible with
the Horizontal2 format Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 devices. The Automation
Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 devices require a cutout that is 4.5 mm larger vertically (lower
edge).

The larger cutout can can be conditionally used for all devices:
When mounting, make sure that the PP100/200/300/400 devices are placed and
mounted as close to the center of the cutout as possible. Failure to do so can prevent the
retaining clips from holding firmly, which means that a firm seal is no longer guaranteed
with the gasket (IP65).
10 323 x 358 10
8,5
303 x 336 0,5

303 x 341 0,5
PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700
5
13,5 PP100/200/300/400
8,5 AP900, PPC700
Auenkontur Gert
Figure 352: Mounting compatibility - 10.4" device format - Vertical1
the Vertical1 format for the Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 devices. The Automation
Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 devices require a cutout that is 5 mm larger vertically (lower edge).
When mounting, make sure that the PP100/200/300/400 devices are placed and
mounted as close to the center of the cutout as possible. Failure to do so can prevent the
retaining clips from holding firmly, which means that a firm seal is no longer guaranteed
with the gasket (IP65).

4.2.3 12,1" devices
10 AP900, PPC700 10 AP900, PPC700

8,5 PP100/200/300/400 362 x 284 8,5 PP100/200/300/400
8,5
345 x 267 0,5
Appendix A
342 x 267 0,5
PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700
8,5
1,5 1,5
Auenkontur Gert
the Horizontal1 format for the Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700 devices. The Power
Panel 100/200 and Power Panel 300/400 devices require a cut that is 1.5 mm wider (left and
right).
When mounting, make sure that the AP900 and PPC700 devices can be placed and
mounted as close to the center of the cutout as possible.

4.2.4 15" devices
10 435 x 330 10
9
PP100/200/300/400 AP900/PPC700
415 x 312 0,5
PP100/200/300/400 AP900
9
Auenkontur Gert
Ausschnitt Gert
Figure 354: Mounting compatibility - 15" device format - Horizontal1
15" Power Panel 100/200, Power Panel 300/400, Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700
devices in Horizontal1 format are 100% mounting compatible.
10 435 x 430 10
9
415 x 412 0,5

PP100/200/300/400 AP900
9
Auenkontur Gert
Ausschnitt Gert
Figure 355: Mounting compatibility - 15" device format - Vertical1
15" Power Panel 100/200, Power Panel 300/400, Automation Panel 900 and Panel PC 700
devices in Vertical1 format are 100% mounting compatible.

Appendix A B&R Key Editor information
5. B&R Key Editor information
On display units, it is often necessary to adjust the function keys and LEDs for the application
software being used. The B&R Key Editor makes it quick and easy to adapt the application to a
unique configuration.
Appendix A
Figure 356: B&R Key Editor screenshots Version 3.10 (representation picture)
Features:
Configuration of normal keys like on a keyboard (A, B, C, etc.)

Keyboard shortcuts (CTRL+C, SHIFT+DEL, etc.) on one key
Special key functions (change brightness, etc.)
Assign functions to LEDs (HDD access, power, etc.)
4 assignments per key possible (using layer function)
Configuration of panel locking time when multiple Automation Panel 900 devices are
connected to Automation PCs and Panel PCs devices.

Appendix A B&R Key Editor information
Supports following systems (Version 3.10):
Automation PC 620
Automation PC 810
Automation PC 820
IPC2000, IPC2001, IPC2002
IPC5000, IPC5600
IPC5000C, IPC5600C
Mobile Panel 40/50
Panel PC 300
Panel PC 700
Panel PC 800
Power Panel 100/200
Power Panel 300/400
Power Panel 500 (the Key Editor device file must be downloaded separately from the
B&R homepage)
A detailed guide for configuring keys and LEDs can be found in the B&R Key Editor's online help.
The B&R Key Editor can be downloaded for free from the download area on the B&R homepage
(www.br-automation.com ). Additionally, it can also be found on the B&R HMI Drivers & Utilities
DVD (model number 5SWHMI.0000-00).

Appendix A B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit
6. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit
This software can be used to activate functions of the B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI)
from Windows applications, which, for example, were created using the following development
tools:
Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0

Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0
Microsoft eMbedded Visual C++ 4.0
Appendix A
Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 (or newer)
Figure 357: ADI development kit screenshots (Version 3.10)
Features:
One Microsoft Visual Basic module with declarations for the ADI functions.
Header files and import libraries for Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 and Microsoft eMbedded
Visual C++ 4.0.
Help files for Visual Basic and Visual C++.
Sample projects for Visual Basic and Visual C++.
ADI DLL (for testing the applications, if no ADI driver is installed).

Appendix A B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit
Supports following systems (Version 3.10 and higher):
Automation PC 620
Automation PC 810
Automation PC 820
Mobile Panel 40/50
Panel PC 300
Panel PC 700
Panel PC 800
Power Panel 100/200
Power Panel 300/400
Power Panel 500
The ADI driver suitable for the device must be installed on the stated product series. The ADI
driver is already included in the B&R images of embedded operating systems.
A detailed description of using the ADI functions can be found in the integrated online help.
The B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) development kit can be downloaded for free from
the download area on the B&R homepage (www.br-automation.com).

Appendix A B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK
7. B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK
This software can be used to activate functions of the B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI)
from .NET applications, which were created using Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 (or newer).
Supported programming languages:
Visual Basic
Visual C++
Appendix A
Visual C#
Visual J#
System requirements:
Developingsystem: PC with Windows XP/7 with

- Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 or newer
- Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 and / or Microsoft .NET Compact Framework 2.0
or newer
- Optional for Windows CE Systems: B&R Windows CE SDK
Figure 358: ADI .NET SDK Screenshots (Version 1.30)

Appendix A B&R Automation Device Interface (ADI) .NET SDK
Features:
ADI .NET Class Library.

Help files in HTML Help 1.0 format (.chm file) and MS Help 2.0 format (.HxS file).
Sample projects and code snippets for Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual C# and Visual J#.
ADI DLL (for testing the applications, if no ADI driver is installed).
Supports following systems (Version 1.30 and higher):
Automation PC 620
Automation PC 810
Automation PC 820
Mobile Panel 40/50
Panel PC 300
Panel PC 700
Panel PC 800
Power Panel 100/200
Power Panel 300/400
The ADI driver suitable for the device must be installed on the stated product series. The ADI
driver is already included in the B&R images of embedded operating systems.
A detailed description of using the ADI functions can be found in the integrated online help.
The ADI .NET SDK can be downloaded for free from the download area on the B&R homepage

Appendix A Glossary
8. Glossary
ACPI
Abbreviation for "Advanced Configuration and Power Interface". Configuration interface that
enables the operating system to control the power supply for each device connected to the PC.
With ACPI, the computer's BIOS is only responsible for the details of communication with the
hardware.
Appendix A
Automation Runtime
A uniform runtime system for all B&R automation components.
BIOS
An abbreviation for "Basic Input/Output System". Core software for computer systems with
essential routines for controlling input and output processes on hardware components, for
performing tests after system start and for loading the operating system. Although BIOS is used
to configure a system's performance, the user does not usually come into contact with it.
Bit
Binary digit > binary position, binary character, smallest discrete unit of information. A bit can
have the value 0 or 1.
Bit rate
The number of bits that can be transferred within a specified time unit. 1 bit/sec = 1 baud.
Bootstrap loader
A program that automatically runs when the computer is switched on or restarted. After some
basic hardware tests have been carried out, the bootstrap loader starts a larger loader and hands
over control to it, which in turn boots the operating system. The bootstrap loader is typically found
in ROM on the computer.
Byte
Data format [1 byte = 8 bits] and a unit for characterizing information amounts and memory
capacity. The following units are the commonly used units of progression: KB, MB, GB.
B&R Automation Runtime
Windows-based program for creating installation disks to install B&R Automation Runtime on
the target system.

Appendix A Glossary
Cache
Background memory, also known as non-addressable memory or fast buffer memory. It is used
to relieve the fast main memory of a computer. For example, data that should be output to slower
components by the working memory (e.g. disk storage, printers) is stored temporarily in cache
memory and output from there at an appropriate speed for the target devices.
CE mark
A CE mark for a product. It consists of the letters "CE" and indicates conformity to all EU
guidelines for the labeled product. It indicates that the individual or corporate body who has
performed or attached the label assures that the product conforms to all EU guidelines for
complete harmonization. It also indicates that all mandatory conformity evaluation procedures
have taken place.
CMOS
"CMOS" is a battery powered memory area where fundamental parameters of an IBM (or
compatible) personal computer are stored. Information such as the type of hard drive, size of the
working memory and the current date and time are required when booting the computer. As the
name suggests, the memory is based on CMOS technology standards.
COM
A device name used to access serial ports in MS-DOS. The first serial port can be accessed
under COM1, the second under COM2, etc. A modem, mouse, or serial printer is typically
connected to a serial port.
CompactFlash
CompactFlash memory cards [CF cards] are exchangeable nonvolatile mass memory systems
with very small dimensions [43 x 36 x 3.3 mm, approximately half the size of a credit card]. In
addition to the flash memory chips, the controller is also present on the cards. CF cards provide
complete PC card / ATA functionality and compatibility. A 50-pin CF card can be simply inserted
in a passive 68-pin type II adapter card. It conforms to all electrical and mechanical PC card
interface specifications. CF cards were launched by SanDisk back in 1994. Currently, memory
capacities reach up to 8 GB per unit. Since 1995, CompactFlash Association [CFA] has been
looking after standardization and the worldwide distribution of CF technology
Controller
A device component which allows access to other devices on a computer subsystem. A disk
controller, for example, allows access to hard disks and disk drives and is responsible both for
physical and logic drive access.

Appendix A Glossary
CPU
An abbreviation for "Central Processing Unit". Interprets and executes commands. It is also
known as a "microprocessor" or "processor" for short. A processor is able to receive, decode and
execute commands, as well as transfer information to and from other resources via the computer
bus.
CTS
An abbreviation for "Clear To Send". A signal used when transferring serial data from modem to
computer, indicating its readiness to send the data. CTS is a hardware signal which is transferred
Appendix A
via line number 5 in compliance with the RS-232-C standard.
DCD
An abbreviation for "Data Carrier Detected". A signal used in serial communication that is sent
by the modem to the computer it is connected to, indicating that it is ready for transfer.
DDR SDRAM
An abbreviation for "Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory".
DMA
Direct Memory Access > Accelerated direct access to a computers RAM by bypassing the CPU.
DRAM
An abbreviation for "Dynamic Random Access Memory". Dynamic RAM consists of an

integrated semiconductor circuit that stores information based on the capacitor principle.
Capacitors lose their charge in a relatively short time. Therefore, dynamic RAM circuit boards
must contain a logic that allows continual recharging of RAM chips. Since the processor cannot
access dynamic RAM while it is being recharged, one or more waiting states can occur when
reading or writing data. Although it is slower, dynamic RAM is used more often than static RAM
since the simple design of the circuits means that it can store four times more data than static
RAM.
DSR
An abbreviation for "Data Set Ready". A signal used in serial data transfer, which is sent by the
modem to the computer it is connected to, indicating its readiness for processing. DSR is a
hardware signal which is sent via line number 6 in compliance with the RS-232-C standard.
DTR
An abbreviation for "Data Terminal Ready". A signal used in serial data transfer that is sent by
the computer to the modem it is connected to, indicating the computer's readiness to accept
incoming signals.

Appendix A Glossary
EDID data
Abbreviation for "Extended Display Identification Data". EDID data contains the characteristics
of monitors / TFT displays transferred as 128 KB data blocks to the graphics card via the Display
Data Channel (DDC). This EDID data can be used to set the graphics card to the monitor
properties.
EMC
"Electromagnetic Compatibility" The ability of a device or a system to function satisfactorily in its

electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable electromagnetic disturbances to
anything in that environment [IEV 161-01-07].
Encode, encoding
When processing information, it is often necessary to change the information from one form of
representation to another. This conversion process is called encoding, and the rules used to
assign one character set to another are referred to as encoding rules. A differentiation is made
between ambiguous and unambiguous encoding depending on if one set is a direct reflection of
the other. Most codes use unambiguous encoding with one set directly reflecting the other. A
differentiation is also made between redundant and non-redundant encoding. With non-
redundant encoding, the full range of the available character set is used, i.e. each code is
defined. With redundant encoding, the available character set also contains codes that are not
used. This differentiation is important during data transfer when detecting and, if necessary,
correcting data transfer errors.
EPROM
Erasable PROM > (completely with ultraviolet light).
Ethernet
An IEEE 802.3 standard for networks. Ethernet uses bus or star topology and controls the traffic
on communication lines using the access procedure CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access
with Collision Detection). Network nodes are connected using coaxial cables, fiber optic cables
or twisted pair cabling. Data transfer on an Ethernet network takes place in frames of variable
lengths that consist of supply and controller information as well as 1500 bytes of data. The
Ethernet standard provides base band transfers at 10 megabit and 100 megabit per second.
FIFO
An abbreviation for "First In First Out". A queuing organization method whereby elements are
removed in the same order as they were inserted. The first element inserted is the first one
removed. Such an organization method is typical for a list of documents that are waiting to be
printed.

Appendix A Glossary
Firmware
Programs stored permanently in read-only memory. Firmware is software used to operate

computer-controlled devices that generally stays in the device throughout its lifespan or over a
long period of time. Such software includes operating systems for CPUs and application
programs for industrial PCs as well as programmable logic controllers (e.g. the software in a
washing machine controller). This software is written in read-only memory (ROM, PROM,
EPROM) and cannot be easily replaced.
Appendix A
GB
Gigabyte (1 GB = 230 or 1,073,741,824 bytes)
Handshake
Method of synchronization for data transfer when data is sent at irregular intervals. The sender
signals that data can be sent, and the receiver signals when new data can be received.
IDE
An abbreviation for "Integrated Drive Electronics". A drive interface where the controller
electronics are integrated in the drive.
Interface
From the hardware point of view, an interface is the connection point between two
modules/devices/systems. The units on both sides of the interface are connected by the
interface lines so that data, addresses, and control signals can be exchanged. The term interface
includes all functional, electrical and constructive conditions [encoding, signal level, pin
assignments] that characterize the connection point between the modules, devices, or systems.
Depending on the type of data transfer, a differentiation is made between parallel [e.g.
Centronics, IEEE 488] and serial interfaces [e.g. V.24, TTY, RS232, RS422, RS485], which are
set up for different transfer speeds and transfer distances. From the point of view of software,
the term "interface" describes the transfer point between program modules using specified rules
for transferring the program data.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization > Worldwide federation of national

standardization institutions from over 130 countries. ISO is not an acronym for the name of the
organization; it is derived from the Greek word "isos", meaning "equal" (www.iso.ch).

Appendix A Glossary
LCD
An abbreviation for "Liquid Crystal Display". A display type, based on liquid crystals that have a
polarized molecular structure and are enclosed between two transparent electrodes as a thin
layer. If an electrical field is applied to the electrodes, the molecules align themselves with the
field and form crystalline arrangements that polarize the light passing through. A polarization
filter, which is arranged using lamellar electrodes, blocks the polarized light. In this way, a cell
(pixel) containing liquid crystals can be switched on using electrode gates, thus coloring this pixel
black. Some LCD displays have an electroluminescent plate behind the LCD screen for lighting.
Other types of LCD displays can use color.
LED
An abbreviation for "Light Emitting Diode". A semiconductor diode which converts electrical
energy into light. LEDs work on the principle of electroluminescence. They are highly efficient
because they do not produce much heat in spite of the amount of light they emit. For example,
"operational status indicators" on floppy disk drives are LEDs.
MB
Megabyte (1 MB = 220 or 1,048,576 bytes).
Microprocessor
Highly integrated circuit with the functionality of a CPU, normally housed on a single chip. It
comprises a control unit, arithmetic and logic unit, several registers and a link system for
connecting memory and peripheral components. The main performance features are the internal
and external data bus and address bus widths, the command set and the clock frequency.
Additionally, a choice can be made between CISC and RISC processors. The first commercially
available worldwide microprocessor was the Intel 4004. It came on the market in 1971.
MTBF
An abbreviation for "Mean time between failure". The average time which passes before a
hardware component fails and repair is needed. This time is usually expressed in thousands or
ten thousands of hours, sometimes known as power-on hours (POH).
Multitasking
Multitasking is an operating mode in an operating system that allows several computer tasks to
be executed virtually simultaneously.
Node
Branching point in a network.

Appendix A Glossary
PnP
An abbreviation for "Plug and Play". Specifications developed by Intel. Using Plug and Play
allows a PC to automatically configure itself so that it can communicate with peripheral devices
(e.g. monitors, modems, and printers). Users can connect a peripheral device (plug) and it
immediately runs (play) without having to manually configure the system. A Plug and Play PC
requires a BIOS that supports Plug and Play and a respective expansion card.
POH
Appendix A
An abbreviation for "Power On Hours". See MTBF.
POST
An abbreviation for "Power-On Self Test". A set of routines that are stored in ROM on the
computer and that test different system components, e.g. RAM, disk drive and the keyboard in
order to determine that the connection is operating correctly and ready for operation. POST
routines notify the user of problems that occur. This is done using several signal tones or by
displaying a message that frequently accompanies a diagnosis value on the standard output or
standard error devices (generally the monitor). If the POST runs successfully, control is
transferred over to the system's bootstrap loader.
Power Panel
Power Panel is part of the B&R product family and is a combination of an operator panel and
controller in one device. This covers the PP21 and PP41 products.
QVGA
Abbreviation for "Quarter Video Graphics Array". Usually a screen resolution of 320 240 pixels.
RAM
An abbreviation for "Random Access Memory". Semiconductor memory which can be read or
written to by the microprocessor or other hardware components. Memory locations can be
accessed in any order. The various ROM memory types do allow random access, but they
cannot be written to. The term RAM refers to a more temporary memory that can be written to
as well as read.
ROM
An abbreviation for "Read-Only Memory". Semiconductor memory where programs or data were
permanently stored during the production process.

Appendix A Glossary
RS232
Recommended Standard Number 232. Oldest and most widespread interface standard, also
called a V.24 interface. All signals are referenced to ground making this an unbalanced interface.
High level: -3 to -30 V, low level: +3 to +30 V; cable lengths up to 15 m, transfer rates up to 20
kbit/s; for point-to-point connections between 2 stations.
RTS
An abbreviation for "Request To Send". A signal used in serial data transfer for requesting send
permission. For example, it is sent from a computer to the modem connected to it. The RTS
signal is assigned to pin 4 according to the hardware specifications of the RS-232-C standard.
RXD
An abbreviation for "Receive (RX) Data". A line for transferring serial data received from one
device to another, e.g. from a modem to a computer. For connections complying with the RS-
232-C standard, the RXD is connected to pin 3 of the plug.
SDRAM
An abbreviation for "Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory". A construction of

dynamic semiconductor components (DRAM) that can operate with higher clock rates than
conventional DRAM switching circuits. This is made possible using block access. For each
access, the DRAM determines the next memory addresses to be accessed.
SRAM
An abbreviation for "Static Random Access Memory". A semiconductor memory (RAM) made up
of certain logic circuits (flip-flop) that only keeps stored information while powered. In computers,
static RAM is generally only used for cache memory.
SVGA
Abbreviation for "Super Video Graphics Array"; Graphics standard with a resolution of at least
800600 pixels and at least 256 colors.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Suit of Protocols. Network protocol that has become the
generally accepted standard for data exchange in heterogeneous networks. TCP/IP is used both
in local networks for communication between various computer and also for LAN to WAN
access.

Appendix A Glossary
TFT display
LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) technology where the display consists of a large grid of LCD cells.
Each pixel is represented by a cell, whereby electrical fields produced in the cells are supported
by thin film transistors (TFT) that result in an active matrix. In its simplest form, there is exactly
one thin film transistor per cell. Displays with an active matrix are generally used in laptops and
notebooks because they are thin, offer high-quality color displays and can be viewed from all
angles.
Touch screen
Appendix A
Screen with touch sensors for selecting options in a displayed menu using the tip of the finger.
TXD
An abbreviation for "Transmit (TX) Data". A line for the transfer of serial data sent from one
device to another, e.g. from a computer to a modem. For connections complying with the RS-
232-C standard, the TXD is connected to pin 2 of the plug.
UART
An abbreviation for "Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter". A module generally

consisting of a single integrated circuit that combines the circuits required for asynchronous
serial communication for both sending and receiving. UART represents the most common type
of circuit in modems for connecting to a personal computer.
UDMA
An abbreviation for "Ultra Direct Memory Access". A special IDE data transfer mode that allows
high data transfer rates for drives. There have been many variations in recent times.
UDMA33 mode transfers 33 megabytes per second.
Both the mainboard and the hard drive must support the specification to implement
modifications.
USB
An abbreviation for "Universal Serial Bus" A serial bus with a bandwidth of up to 12 megabits per
second (Mbit/s) for connecting a peripheral device to a microcomputer. Up to 127 devices can
be connected to the system using a single multipurpose connection, the USB bus (e.g. external
CD drives, printers, modems as well as the mouse and keyboard). This is done by connecting
the devices in a row. USB allows devices to be changed when the power supply is switched on
(hot plugging) and multi-layered data flow.

Appendix A Glossary
VGA
An abbreviation for "Video Graphics Adapter". A video adapter which can handle all EGA
(Enhanced Graphics Adapter) video modes and adds several new modes.
Visual Components
Integrated in B&R Automation Studio. Visual Components can be used to configure visualization
projects that use text and graphics.
Windows CE
Compact 32-bit operating system with multitasking and multithreading that Microsoft developed
especially for the OEM market. It can be ported for various processor types and has a high
degree of real-time capability. The development environment uses proven, well-established
development tools. It is an open and scalable Windows operating system platform for many
different devices. Examples of such devices are handheld PCs, digital wireless receivers,
intelligent mobile phones, multimedia consoles, etc. In embedded systems, Windows CE is also
an excellent choice for automation technology.
XGA
An abbreviation for "EXtended Graphics Array". An expanded standard for graphics controllers
and monitors that was introduced by IBM in 1990. This standard supports 640x480 resolution
with 65,536 colors or 1024x768 resolution with 256 colors. This standard is generally used in
workstation systems.

Figure index
Figure index
Figure 1: Power Panel 300 and Power Panel 400 devices ........................................... 41
Figure 2: Different plug and key positions (PP100/200 - PP300/400) ........................... 43
Figure 3: Temperature sensor locations........................................................................ 44
Figure 4: Supply voltage connection ............................................................................. 45
Figure 5: Functional grounding clip ............................................................................... 46
Figure 6: BIOS boot mode switch.................................................................................. 50
Figure 7: CompactFlash slot.......................................................................................... 54
Figure 8: Device label.................................................................................................... 55
Figure 9: Design/dimensions - Serial number sticker .................................................... 55
Figure 10: Example - Material number search: 5PP320.0571-29 ................................... 56
Figure index
Figure 11: Front view - 5PP320.0571-29......................................................................... 57
Figure 12: Rear view - 5PP320.0571-29 ......................................................................... 57
Figure 13: Temperature humidity diagram - 5PP320.0571-29 ........................................ 61
Figure 14: Dimensions - 5PP320.0571-29 ...................................................................... 61
Figure 15: Cutout installation - 5PP320.0571-29............................................................. 62
Figure 26: Front view - 5PP320.0573-3B ........................................................................ 75
Figure 27: Rear view - 5PP320.0573-3B......................................................................... 75
Figure 28: Temperature humidity diagram - 5PP320.0573-3B........................................ 79
Figure 29: Dimensions - 5PP320.0573-3B ...................................................................... 79
Figure 30: Cutout installation - 5PP320.0573-3B ............................................................ 80
Figure 46: Front view - 5PP320.1505-3B ........................................................................ 99
Figure 47: Rear view - 5PP320.1505-3B......................................................................... 99

Figure index
Figure 48: Temperature humidity diagram - 5PP320.1505-3B...................................... 103

Figure 49: Dimensions - 5PP320.1505-3B .................................................................... 103
Figure 50: Cutout installation - 5PP320.1505-3B .......................................................... 104
Figure 51: Supply voltage connection ........................................................................... 105
Figure 52: Functional grounding clip ............................................................................. 106
Figure 53: BIOS boot mode switch................................................................................ 110
Figure 54: CompactFlash slot........................................................................................ 114
Figure 55: Device label.................................................................................................. 115
Figure 56: Design/dimensions - Serial number sticker .................................................. 115
Figure 57: Example - Material number search: 4PP320.1043-01 ................................. 116
Figure 58: Front view - 4PP320.0571-01....................................................................... 117
Figure 59: Rear view - 4PP320.0571-01 ....................................................................... 117
Figure 60: Temperature humidity diagram - 4PP320.0571-01 ...................................... 121
Figure 61: Dimensions - 4PP320.0571-01 .................................................................... 121
Figure 62: Cutout installation - 4PP320.0571-01........................................................... 122

Figure index

Figure 98: Supply voltage connection ........................................................................... 165
Figure 99: Functional grounding clip ............................................................................. 166
Figure 100: BIOS boot mode switch................................................................................ 170
Figure 101: CompactFlash slot........................................................................................ 174
Figure 102: aPCI Slot(s) .................................................................................................. 174
Figure 103: Device label.................................................................................................. 175
Figure 104: Design/dimensions - Serial number sticker .................................................. 175
Figure index
Figure 105: Example - Material number search: 4PP420.0571-45 ................................. 176
Figure 126: Front view - 4PP420.0571-A5 ...................................................................... 201
Figure 127: Rear view - 4PP420.0571-A5....................................................................... 201
Figure 128: Temperature humidity diagram - 4PP420.0571-A5...................................... 205
Figure 129: Dimensions - 4PP420.0571-A5 .................................................................... 205
Figure 130: Cutout installation - 4PP420.0571-A5 .......................................................... 206
Figure 131: Front view - 4PP420.0571-B5 ...................................................................... 207
Figure 132: Rear view - 4PP420.0571-B5....................................................................... 207
Figure 133: Temperature humidity diagram - 4PP420.0571-B5...................................... 211
Figure 134: Dimensions - 4PP420.0571-B5 .................................................................... 211
Figure 135: Cutout installation - 4PP420.0571-B5 .......................................................... 212

Figure index


Figure index

Figure index

Figure index

Figure 256: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light, monochrome LCD................ 380
Figure 257: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 light color LCD and color TFT ...... 380
Figure 258: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact, monochrome LCD......... 384
Figure 259: Temperature humidity diagram - PP420 compact color LCD and color TFT 385
Figure 260: Temperature humidity diagram - PP451 light............................................... 389
Figure 261: Temperature humidity diagram - PP451 compact........................................ 393
Figure 262: Temperature humidity diagram - PP452 light............................................... 397
Figure 263: Temperature humidity diagram - PP452 compact........................................ 401
Figure 264: Block diagram - Power Panel 300 ................................................................ 402
Figure 265: Block diagram - Power Panel 400 with 1 aPCI slot ...................................... 403
Figure 266: Block diagram - Power Panel 400 with 2 aPCI slots .................................... 404
Figure 267: Retaining clip................................................................................................ 405
Figure 268: BIOS summary screen for VGA, SVGA and XGA Power Panel devices ..... 414
Figure 269: BIOS summary screen for QVGA Power Panel devices .............................. 414
Figure 270: Press DEL for setup ..................................................................................... 415
Figure 271: Main menu.................................................................................................... 417
Figure 272: Time ............................................................................................................. 418
Figure 273: Date.............................................................................................................. 419
Figure 274: Motherboard device configuration ................................................................ 420
Figure 275: Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration ............................... 421
Figure 276: Motherboard device configuration - I/O configuration .................................. 422
Figure 277: Motherboard device configuration - video and flat panel configuration ........ 423
Figure 278: Motherboard device configuration - PCI configuration ................................. 424
Figure 279: Motherboard device configuration - USB configuration................................ 425
Figure 280: Motherboard device configuration - thermal configuration ........................... 426
Figure 281: Memory and cache optimization................................................................... 427
Figure 282: System clock/PLL configuration ................................................................... 428

Figure index
Figure 283: Power management ..................................................................................... 429

Figure 284: Device information........................................................................................ 430
Figure 285: Miscellaneous configuration ......................................................................... 432
Figure 286: Boot order .................................................................................................... 433
Figure 287: Load defaults................................................................................................ 435
Figure 288: Save values without exit............................................................................... 436
Figure 289: Exit without save .......................................................................................... 437
Figure 290: Save values and exit .................................................................................... 438
Figure 291: Main menu.................................................................................................... 439
Figure 292: Time ............................................................................................................. 440
Figure index
Figure 293: Date.............................................................................................................. 441
Figure 294: Motherboard device configuration ................................................................ 442
Figure 295: Motherboard device configuration - drive configuration ............................... 443
Figure 296: Motherboard device configuration - I/O configuration .................................. 444
Figure 297: Motherboard device configuration - video and flat panel configuration ........ 445
Figure 298: Motherboard device configuration - PCI configuration ................................. 446
Figure 299: Motherboard device configuration - USB configuration................................ 447
Figure 300: Motherboard device configuration - thermal configuration ........................... 448
Figure 301: Memory and cache optimization................................................................... 449
Figure 302: System clock/PLL configuration ................................................................... 450
Figure 303: Power management ..................................................................................... 451
Figure 304: Device information........................................................................................ 452
Figure 305: Miscellaneous configuration ......................................................................... 453
Figure 306: Boot order .................................................................................................... 454
Figure 307: Load defaults................................................................................................ 456
Figure 308: Save values without exit............................................................................... 457
Figure 309: Exit without save .......................................................................................... 457
Figure 310: Save values and exit .................................................................................... 458
Figure 311: Automation Runtime summary screen - ex. 4PP420.1043-75 ..................... 466
Figure 312: Power Panel 300 as an intelligent visualization system ............................... 467
Figure 313: Power Panel 400 with, e.g. Power Panel 300 terminals............................... 468
Figure 314: BIOS upgrade start menu............................................................................. 471
Figure 315: MTCX upgrade start menu ........................................................................... 473
Figure 316: aPCI firmware upgrade start menu .............................................................. 476
Figure 317: User boot logo upgrade start menu.............................................................. 477
Figure 318: Creating a bootable diskette in Windows XP - step 1 .................................. 479
Figure 323: Creating a USB flash drive for B&R upgrade files........................................ 482
Figure 324: Creating a CompactFlash card for B&R upgrade files ................................. 484
Figure 325: Windows CE logo ......................................................................................... 485
Figure 326: Windows XP embedded Logo ...................................................................... 489
Figure 327: Windows Embedded Standard 2009 Logo................................................... 491
Figure 328: ADI Control Center screenshots - Examples (symbol photo)....................... 495
Figure 329: Legend strip templates ................................................................................. 525

Figure index
Figure 330: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04 ... 530
Figure 331: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I ..................................................... 530
Figure 332: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (reading)..................................... 531
Figure 333: ATTO disk benchmark v2.34 comparison (writing) ...................................... 531
Figure 334: Temperature humidity diagram - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03 ... 534
Figure 335: Dimensions - CompactFlash card Type I ..................................................... 535
Figure 336: Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-00........ 538
Figure 337: Temperature humidity diagram - USB flash drive - 5MMUSB.2048-01........ 540
Figure 338: Null modem cable 9A0017.0x ...................................................................... 541
Figure 339: Pin assignments - null modem cable............................................................ 542
Figure 340: HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD 5SWHMI.0000-00 ............................................ 543
Figure 341: Battery handling ........................................................................................... 551
Figure 342: Temperature humidity diagram - Elo Accu touch screen ............................. 554
Figure 343: Temperature humidity diagram - Gunze touch screen ................................. 556
Figure 344: Temperature humidity diagram - AMT touch screen .................................... 558
Figure 345: Viewing angles ............................................................................................. 560
Figure 346: Compatibility details - figure structure .......................................................... 563
Figure 347: Mounting compatibility - 5.7" device format - Horizontal1 ............................ 563
Figure 348: Mounting compatibility - 5.7" device format - Horizontal2 ............................ 564
Figure 349: Mounting compatibility - 5.7" device format - Vertical1 ................................ 564
Figure 350: Mounting compatibility - 10.4" device format - Horizontal1 .......................... 565
Figure 352: Mounting compatibility - 10.4" device format - Vertical1 .............................. 566
Figure 354: Mounting compatibility - 15" device format - Horizontal1 ............................. 568
Figure 355: Mounting compatibility - 15" device format - Vertical1 ................................. 568
Figure 356: B&R Key Editor screenshots Version 3.10 (representation picture)............. 569
Figure 357: ADI development kit screenshots (Version 3.10) ......................................... 571
Figure 358: ADI .NET SDK Screenshots (Version 1.30) ................................................. 573

Table index
Table index
Table 1: Manual history ..................................................................................................... 21

Table 2: Environmentally-friendly separation of materials................................................. 29
Table 3: Organization of safety notices ............................................................................. 30
Table 4: Model number overview - Power Panel 300 devices .......................................... 31
Table 7: Model number overview - Power Panel light / compact devices ......................... 36
Table 8: Model number overview - Software..................................................................... 37
Table 9: Model number overview - Accessories ............................................................... 38
Table 10: Temperature sensor locations............................................................................. 44
Table 11: Pin assignments - COM ...................................................................................... 47
Table 12: USB ports ............................................................................................................ 48
Table 13: Mode/Node switches ........................................................................................... 49
Table 14: Switch settings for the Mode/Node switch .......................................................... 49
Table 15: BIOS boot mode switch positions (based on the image) .................................... 50
Table 16: Status LEDs ........................................................................................................ 51
Table 17: Ethernet interface ................................................................................................ 52
Table 18: Power button ....................................................................................................... 53
Table index
Table 19: Reset button ........................................................................................................ 53
Table 20: Technical data - 5PP320.0571-29....................................................................... 58
Table 21: Contents of delivery - 5PP320.0571-29 .............................................................. 62
Table 26: Technical data - 5PP320.0573-3B ...................................................................... 76
Table 27: Contents of delivery - 5PP320.0573-3B .............................................................. 80
Table 34: Technical data - 5PP320.1505-3B .................................................................... 100
Table 35: Contents of delivery - 5PP320.1505-3B ............................................................ 104
Table 36: Pin assignments - COM .................................................................................... 107
Table 37: USB ports .......................................................................................................... 108
Table 38: Mode/Node switches ......................................................................................... 109
Table 39: Switch settings for the Mode/Node switch ........................................................ 109
Table 40: BIOS boot mode switch positions (based on the image) .................................. 110
Table 41: Status LEDs ...................................................................................................... 112
Table 42: Ethernet interface .............................................................................................. 112
Table 43: Power button ..................................................................................................... 113
Table 44: Reset button ...................................................................................................... 113
Table 45: Technical data - 4PP320.0571-01..................................................................... 118
Table 46: Contents of delivery - 4PP320.0571-01 ............................................................ 122

Table index

Table 61: Pin assignments - COM .................................................................................... 167
Table 62: USB ports .......................................................................................................... 168
Table 63: Mode/Node switches ......................................................................................... 169
Table 64: Switch settings for the Mode/Node switch ........................................................ 169
Table 65: BIOS boot mode switch positions (based on the image) .................................. 170
Table 66: Status LEDs ...................................................................................................... 172
Table 67: Ethernet interface .............................................................................................. 172
Table 68: Power button ..................................................................................................... 173
Table 69: Reset button ...................................................................................................... 173
Table 78: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-A5 .................................................................... 202
Table 79: Contents of delivery - 4PP420.0571-A5 ............................................................ 206
Table 80: Technical data - 4PP420.0571-B5 .................................................................... 208
Table 81: Contents of delivery - 4PP420.0571-B5 ............................................................ 212

Table index

Table 101: Delivery contents - 4PP451.0571-B5 ................................................................ 277
Table index
Table 130: Technical data - Power Panel 420 light............................................................. 376
Table 131: Technical data - Power Panel 420 compact...................................................... 381
Table 136: Space for air circulation..................................................................................... 406
Table 137: Mounting orientation 0 ..................................................................................... 407
Table 138: Mounting orientation -45 and +45. ................................................................. 408
Table 139: BIOS-relevant keys ........................................................................................... 415
Table 140: Overview of BIOS main menu functions ........................................................... 417
Table 141: BIOS motherboard device configuration menu ................................................. 420

Table index
Table 142: BIOS drive configuration menu ......................................................................... 421

Table 143: BIOS super I/O configuration menu .................................................................. 422
Table 144: BIOS video configuration menu ........................................................................ 423
Table 145: BIOS PCI configuration menu ........................................................................... 424
Table 146: BIOS USB configuration menu.......................................................................... 425
Table 147: BIOS thermal configuration menu ..................................................................... 426
Table 148: BIOS memory and cache optimization menu .................................................... 428
Table 149: System clock/PLL configuration ........................................................................ 428
Table 150: BIOS power management menu....................................................................... 429
Table 151: BIOS device information menu ......................................................................... 430
Table 152: BIOS miscellaneous configuration menu .......................................................... 432
Table 154: Overview of BIOS main menu functions ........................................................... 439
Table 155: BIOS motherboard device configuration menu ................................................. 442
Table 157: BIOS super I/O configuration menu .................................................................. 444
Table 158: BIOS video configuration menu ........................................................................ 445
Table 159: BIOS PCI configuration menu ........................................................................... 446
Table 160: BIOS USB configuration menu.......................................................................... 447
Table 161: BIOS thermal configuration menu ..................................................................... 448
Table 162: BIOS memory and cache optimization menu .................................................... 449
Table 163: System clock/PLL configuration ........................................................................ 450
Table 164: BIOS power management menu....................................................................... 451
Table 165: BIOS device information menu ......................................................................... 452
Table 166: BIOS miscellaneous configuration menu .......................................................... 453
Table 168: Motherboard device configuration default values.............................................. 459
Table 169: Memory and cache optimization default values ................................................ 460
Table 170: System clock/PLL configuration default values ................................................. 460
Table 171: Power management default values................................................................... 460
Table 172: Miscellaneous configuration default values....................................................... 461
Table 173: Boot order default values .................................................................................. 461
Table 174: RAM address assignment ................................................................................. 463
Table 175: DMA channel assignment ................................................................................. 463
Table 176: I/O address assignment .................................................................................... 464
Table 177: Interrupt assignment ......................................................................................... 465
Table 178: Automation Runtime summary screen .............................................................. 466
Table 179: BIOS upgrade menu description ....................................................................... 472
Table 180: aPCI firmware upgrade menu description ......................................................... 476
Table 181: User boot logo upgrade menu description ........................................................ 477
Table 182: Model numbers - Windows CE.......................................................................... 485
Table 183: Windows CE 5.0 features.................................................................................. 486
Table 184: Windows CE 6.0 features.................................................................................. 487
Table 185: Model number overview - Windows XP embedded........................................... 489
Table 186: Device functions in Windows XP embedded with FP2007................................ 489
Table 187: Model numbers - Windows Embedded Standard 2009..................................... 491
Table 188: Device functions in Windows Embedded Standard 2009 ................................. 492

Table index
Table 189: Setting options - VESA mode............................................................................ 494

Table 190: Overview of standards ...................................................................................... 499
Table 191: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for emissions .................................... 501
Table 192: Test requirements - Network-related emissions for industrial areas ................. 501
Table 193: Test requirements - Electromagnetic emissions for industrial areas................. 502
Table 194: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for immunity...................................... 503
Table 195: Test requirements - Electrostatic discharge (ESD) ........................................... 504
Table 196: Test requirements - High-frequency electromagnetic fields (HF field) .............. 504
Table 197: Test requirements - High-speed transient electrical disturbances (burst) ......... 505
Table 198: Test requirements - Surge voltages .................................................................. 505
Table 199: Test requirements - Conducted disturbances ................................................... 505
Table 200: Test requirements - Magnetic fields with electrical frequencies ........................ 506
Table 201: Test requirements - Voltage dips, fluctuations, and short-term interruptions .... 506
Table 202: Test requirements - Damped vibration .............................................................. 507
Table 203: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for vibration....................................... 508
Table 204: Test requirements - Vibration during operation ................................................. 508
Table 205: Test requirements - Vibration during transport (packaged)............................... 509
Table 206: Test requirements - Shock during operation ..................................................... 509
Table index
Table 207: Test requirements - Shock during transport ...................................................... 509
Table 208: Test requirements - Toppling ............................................................................ 509
Table 209: Test requirements - Toppling ............................................................................ 510
Table 210: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for temperature and humidity ........... 511
Table 211: Test requirements - Worst case during operation ............................................. 511
Table 212: Test requirements - Dry heat ............................................................................ 511
Table 213: Test requirements - Dry cold ............................................................................. 511
Table 214: Test requirements - Large temperature fluctuations ......................................... 512
Table 215: Test requirements - Temperature fluctuations during operation ....................... 512
Table 216: Test requirements - Humid heat, cyclic ............................................................. 512
Table 217: Test requirements - Humid heat, constant (storage)......................................... 512
Table 218: Test requirements - Sprayed water (front side)................................................. 513
Table 219: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for safety .......................................... 514
Table 220: Test requirements - Ground resistance............................................................. 514
Table 221: Test requirements - Insulation resistance ......................................................... 514
Table 222: Test requirements - High voltage ...................................................................... 515
Table 223: Test requirements - Voltage range.................................................................... 515
Table 224: Overview of limits and testing guidelines for other tests ................................... 516
Table 225: Test requirements - Protection .......................................................................... 516
Table 226: International certifications ................................................................................. 517
Table 227: Model numbers - Accessories ........................................................................... 519
Table 228: Order data - Lithium batteries ........................................................................... 521
Table 229: Technical data - Lithium batteries ..................................................................... 521
Table 230: Contents of delivery - Lithium batteries ............................................................. 522
Table 231: Order data - TB103 supply plug ........................................................................ 523
Table 232: Technical data - TB103 supply plug .................................................................. 524
Table 233: Contents of delivery - TB103 supply plug ......................................................... 524
Table 234: Order data - Legend strip templates ................................................................. 526
Table 235: Order data - CompactFlash cards ..................................................................... 527

Table index
Table 236: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-04.................................. 528

Table 237: Order data - CompactFlash cards ..................................................................... 532
Table 238: Technical data - CompactFlash cards 5CFCRD.xxxx-03.................................. 533
Table 239: Order data - USB flash drives ........................................................................... 536
Table 240: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-00 ........................................ 537
Table 241: Technical data - USB flash drive 5MMUSB.2048-01 ........................................ 539
Table 242: Model numbers - Null modem cables................................................................ 541
Table 243: Technical data - Null modem cable ................................................................... 541
Table 244: Order data - HMI Drivers & Utilities DVD .......................................................... 543
Table 245: Meaning of battery status OK - Bad .................................................................. 550
Table 246: Changing the battery ......................................................................................... 551
Table 247: Technical data - Elo Accu touch screen 5-wire ................................................. 553
Table 248: Technical data - Gunze touch screen stylus pen .............................................. 555
Table 249: Technical data - AMT Touch ............................................................................. 557
Table 250: Chemical resistance of the dcor foil ................................................................ 559
Table 251: Product abbreviations ....................................................................................... 561
Table 252: Device compatibility overview ........................................................................... 561

Model number index
Model number index
0 5
0AC201.91................................. 38, 519, 521 5AC900.057X-00 ....................... 38, 519, 526
0TB103.9 ................................... 38, 519, 523 5AC900.057X-01 ....................... 38, 519, 526
0TB103.91 ................................. 38, 519, 523 5AC900.104X-00 ....................... 38, 519, 526
5AC900.104X-01 ....................... 39, 519, 526
5AC900.104X-02 ....................... 39, 519, 526
4 5AC900.150X-00 ....................... 39, 519, 526
4A0006.00-000 .......................... 38, 519, 521 5CFCRD.0064-03...................... 39, 519, 532
4PP320.0571-01................................ 32, 117 5CFCRD.0128-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP320.0571-35................................ 32, 123 5CFCRD.016G-04 ..................... 39, 519, 527
4PP320.1043-31................................ 32, 129 5CFCRD.0256-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP320.1505-31................................ 32, 135 5CFCRD.0512-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP351.0571-01................................ 32, 141 5CFCRD.0512-04...................... 39, 519, 527
4PP351.0571-35................................ 32, 147 5CFCRD.1024-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP352.0571-35................................ 32, 153 5CFCRD.1024-04...................... 39, 519, 527
4PP381.1043-31................................ 32, 159 5CFCRD.2048-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP420.0571-45................................ 33, 177 5CFCRD.2048-04...................... 39, 519, 527
4PP420.0571-65................................ 33, 183 5CFCRD.4096-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP420.0571-75................................ 33, 189 5CFCRD.4096-04...................... 39, 519, 527
4PP420.0571-85................................ 33, 195 5CFCRD.8192-03...................... 39, 520, 532
4PP420.0571-A5 ............................... 33, 201 5CFCRD.8192-04...................... 39, 519, 527
4PP420.0571-B5 ............................... 33, 207 5MMUSB.2048-00 ..................... 39, 520, 536
4PP420.0573-75................................ 33, 213 5MMUSB.2048-01 ..................... 39, 520, 536
4PP420.1043-75................................ 33, 219 5PP320.0571-29...................................31, 57
4PP420.1043-B5 ............................... 33, 225 5PP320.0571-39...................................31, 63
4PP420.1505-75................................ 33, 231 5PP320.0573-39...................................31, 69
4PP420.1505-B5 ............................... 34, 237 5PP320.0573-3B ..................................31, 75
4PP451.0571-45................................ 34, 243 5PP320.1043-39...................................31, 81
4PP451.0571-65................................ 34, 250 5PP320.1214-39...................................31, 87
4PP451.0571-75................................ 34, 257 5PP320.1505-39...................................31, 93
4PP451.0571-85................................ 34, 264 5PP320.1505-3B ..................................31, 99
4PP451.0571-B5 ............................... 34, 271 5SWHMI.0000-00 ...................... 39, 520, 543
Model number index
4PP451.1043-75................................ 34, 278 5SWWCE.0521-ENG .........................37, 485

4PP451.1043-B5 ............................... 34, 285 5SWWCE.0522-ENG .........................38, 485
4PP452.0571-45................................ 34, 292 5SWWCE.0621-ENG .........................37, 485
4PP452.0571-65................................ 34, 299 5SWWCE.0622-ENG .........................38, 485
4PP452.0571-75................................ 35, 306 5SWWCE.0821-ENG .........................38, 485
4PP452.0571-B5 ............................... 35, 313 5SWWCE.0822-ENG .........................38, 485
4PP452.1043-75................................ 35, 320 5SWWXP.0421-ENG..........................38, 489
4PP480.1043-75................................ 35, 327 5SWWXP.0422-ENG..........................38, 489
4PP480.1505-75................................ 35, 334 5SWWXP.0721-ENG..........................38, 491
4PP480.1505-B5 ............................... 35, 341 5SWWXP.0722-ENG..........................38, 491
4PP481.1043-75................................ 35, 348
4PP481.1043-B5 ............................... 35, 355 9
4PP481.1505-75................................ 35, 362
4PP482.1043-75................................ 35, 369 9A0017.01 ................................. 39, 520, 541

Model number index
9A0017.02 ................................. 39, 520, 541

Index
Index
A Technical data .............................. 528, 533

CompactFlash slot ..................... 54, 114, 174
ACPI ........................................................575 Control Center ......................................... 495
ADI ...........................................................495 Controller ................................................. 576
.NET SDK .............................................573 CPU ......................................................... 577
Development kit ....................................571 Creating a CompactFlash card for B&R
After-images ............................................552 upgrade files ............................................ 483
aPCI firmware upgrade disk ....................475 CTS ......................................................... 577
aPCI Slot ..................................................174
ATX power supply ......................................53
Automation Device Interface ....................495
D
Automation Runtime ........................466, 575 Data loss .................................... 53, 113, 173
DCD ......................................................... 577
B DDR SDRAM ........................................... 577
Development kit ....................................... 571
B&R Automation Device Interface ...........495 Device ID ................................................. 466
B&R Automation Runtime ........................575 Device label ............................... 55, 115, 175
B&R Control Center .................................495 Dimension standards ................................. 30
B&R Embedded OS Installer ...................488 Display memory effect ............................. 552
BIOS ................................................413, 575 Disposal ..................................................... 29
BIOS upgrade disk ...................................470 Distribution of resources
Bit .............................................................575 DMA channel assignment .................... 463
Bit rate .....................................................575 I/O address assignment ....................... 464
Boot BIOS ................................................466 Interrupt assignment ............................ 465
Bootstrap loader ......................................575 RAM address assignment .................... 463
Burn-in effect ...........................................552 DMA ......................................................... 577
Byte ..........................................................575 DRAM ...................................................... 577
DSR ......................................................... 577
C DTR ......................................................... 577
Cache ......................................................576 E
CE mark ...................................................576
Certifications ............................................517 EDID ........................................................ 578
Cleaning ...........................................554, 556 Elo Accu Touch ....................................... 553
CMOS ......................................................576 Embedded OS Installer ........................... 488
CMOS backup .........................................462 EMC ......................................................... 578
CMOS battery ..........................................521 EPROM ................................................... 578
Code ........................................................578 ESD ........................................................... 26
Coding .....................................................578 Electrical components with housing ....... 26
COM ........................................................576 Electrical components without housing .. 26
COM interface ............................47, 107, 167 Individual components ........................... 27
CompactFlash ..................................536, 576 Packaging .............................................. 26
Dimensions ...................................530, 535 Proper handling ...................................... 26
Index
General information ......................527, 532 Ethernet ................................................... 578

Order data ....................................527, 532 Ethernet interface ...................... 52, 112, 172

Index
F N
FACT .......................................................466 Node ........................................................ 580
FIFO .........................................................578 Null modem cable .................................... 541
Firmware ..................................................579
FPGA .......................................................466
P
Full Speed ..................................48, 108, 168
Pixel error ................................................ 412
G PnP .......................................................... 581
POH ......................................................... 581
GB ............................................................579 POST ....................................................... 581
Power button ............................. 53, 113, 173
Power Panel ............................................ 581
H
Power Panel light / compact
Handshake ...............................................579 Power Panel 420 light / compact .......... 376
High speed .................................48, 108, 168 Power Panel 451 light / compact .......... 386
Power Panel 452 light / compact .......... 394
pre calibration .......................................... 409
I PX32 ........................................................ 466
IDE ...........................................................579
Image retention ........................................552 Q
Image sticking ..........................................552
Interface ...................................................579 QVGA ...................................................... 581
ISO ...........................................................579
R
L RAM ......................................................... 581
LCD ..........................................................580 Reset button .............................. 53, 113, 173
LED ..........................................................580 Revision ................................................... 466
Low speed .................................48, 108, 168 ROM ........................................................ 581
RS232 ...................................................... 582
RTS ......................................................... 582
M RXD ......................................................... 582
MAC address ...........................................466
Manual history ...........................................21 S
MB ...........................................................580
Membrane ................................................559 S/N ........................................................... 466
Microprocessor ........................................580 Safety notices ............................................ 26
Mode/Node ..............................................466 Dust, humidity, aggressive gases .......... 28
Mode/Node switches .................49, 109, 169 Environmentally-friendly disposal ........... 29
Model numbers ..........................................31 Installation .............................................. 28
MS-DOS ..........................................482, 484 Intended use .......................................... 26
MTBF .......................................................580 Operation ............................................... 28
MTCX .........................................................53 Organization ........................................... 30
MTCX Firmware Upgrade ........................473 Policy and procedures ............................ 27
Multitasking ..............................................580 Programs ................................................ 29

Index
Protection against electrostatic discharge .. UDMA ...................................................... 583

26 Upgrade ................................................... 470
Touching electrical parts ........................28 USB ......................................................... 583
Transport and storage ............................27 USB 2.0 ..................................... 48, 108, 168
Viruses ...................................................29 USB flash drive ........................................ 536
Screen rotation ............................22, 59, 410 General information .............................. 536
Automation Runtime / Visual Components . Order data ............................................ 536
410 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-00 ..... 537
Windows CE .........................................410 Technical data - 5MMUSB.2048-01 ..... 539
Windows XP embedded .......................410 USB flash drive for B&R update files ....... 481
SDRAM ....................................................582 USB ports .................................. 48, 108, 168
Serial number sticker .................55, 115, 175 User boot logo upgrade disk .................... 476
SRAM ......................................................582
Standards ................................................499
V
Status LEDs ...............................51, 112, 172
Summary screen ......................................466 VESA mode support ................................ 494
Supply voltage ...........................45, 105, 165 VGA ......................................................... 584
Supply voltage connectors .......................523 Visual Components ................................. 584
SVGA .......................................................582
W
T
Windows CE ............................................ 584
TCP/IP .....................................................582 eMbedded OS Installer ........................ 488
Temperature sensor locations ...................44 General information .............................. 485
TFT display ..............................................583 Installation ............................................ 488
Touch screen ...................................553, 583 Windows Embedded Standard 2009
Touch screen calibration ..........................409 General information .............................. 491
Automation Runtime .............................409 Installation ............................................ 493
Visual Components ..............................409 Touch screen driver ............................. 493
Windows CE .........................................409 Windows XP Embedded
Windows XP embedded .......................409 General information .............................. 489
TXD ..........................................................583 Installation ............................................ 490
U X
UART .......................................................583 XGA ......................................................... 584
Index

Index

Mapp300 - 400-Eng V2 - 42 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mapp300 - 400-Eng V2 - 42 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mapp300 - 400-Eng V2 - 42 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAPP300.

Power Panel 300/400

Version: 2.42 (March 2016)

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 1

Chapter 2: Technical data

Chapter 5: Standards and certifications

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 3

Model number index

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 5

Chapter 1: General information ..................................................... 21

Chapter 2: Technical data .............................................................. 41

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 7

2.2 Stickers .......................................................................................................................... 55

8 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

2.10.2 Temperature humidity diagram ........................................................................... 103

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 9

3.7.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 145

10 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

4.4.3 Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 187

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 11

4.12.2 Temperature humidity diagram ........................................................................... 235

12 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

4.20.1 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 286

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 13

4.28 Device 4PP480.1505-B5 ........................................................................................... 341

14 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

5.3.4 Temperature humidity diagram ............................................................................. 401

Chapter 3: Commissioning .......................................................... 405

Chapter 4: Software ...................................................................... 413

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 15

1.4.2 Time ...................................................................................................................... 440

16 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

Chapter 5: Standards and certifications ..................................... 499

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 17

5. Mechanical conditions ...................................................................................................... 508

Chapter 6: Accessories ................................................................ 519

18 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

6.1 General information ..................................................................................................... 532

Chapter 7: Maintenance / Servicing ............................................ 549

Appendix A: Appendix A .............................................................. 553

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 19

5. B&R Key Editor information .............................................................................................. 569

20 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

Version Date Change

Table 1: Manual history

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 21

Version Date Change

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

22 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

Version Date Change

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 23

Version Date Change

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

24 Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42

Version Date Change

Table 1: Manual history (Forts.)

Power Panel 300/400 User's Manual V 2.42 25

2.1 Intended use